Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/256
Nächste Seite
1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-3 M2002
©
Saab Automobile AB 2001
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
Safety 11
Security 35
Convertible 47
Instruments and controls 59
Saab 9-3 Audio System 93
OnStar - Telematics 111
Interior equipment, trunk 123
Starting and driving 145
Car care 185
Maintenance and owner assistance 229
Technical data 233
Index 247
1

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Inhalt der Seiten


  • Page 1

    1

    Owner’s Manual
    Saab 9-3 M2002
    Safety
    Security
    Convertible
    Instruments and controls
    Saab 9-3 Audio System
    OnStar - Telematics
    Interior equipment, trunk
    Starting and driving
    Car care
    Maintenance and owner assistance
    Technical data
    Index
    © Saab

    Automobile AB 2001

    Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
    Printed in Sweden

    11
    35
    47
    59
    93
    111
    123
    145
    185
    229
    233
    247



  • Page 2

    2
    NOTE

    IB1884

    NOTE texts warn of potential damage to
    the car if the recommendations are not
    followed.

    Introduction
    This manual provides practical guidance on
    driving and caring for your Saab.
    The Saab 9-3 is available with a 2.0L
    turbo-engine, 185 hp (Canada only) or 205
    hp or a 2.3L turbo-engine, 230 hp.
    Although the manual describes the most
    important differences between model variants, it does not include precise specifications of the different variants. Some differences also occur to meet special legal
    requirements in different countries.
    Importation and distribution of Saab automobiles, spare parts and accessories are
    handled exclusively by General Motors of
    Canada Limited in Canada and by Saab
    Cars USA, Inc. in the U.S.A.
    We recommend that you read through the
    manual before taking the car out for the first

    time and that you keep it in the car for future
    reference.
    To find a specific item, use the overviews
    given on pages 3-6. A list of contents is
    given at the beginning of each section of the
    manual, and there is also a comprehensive
    index at the back of the book.
    Supplied with the car is a Warranties and
    Service Record booklet and a tire warranty
    folder which specifies the regular maintenance to be carried out. The book also contains important warranty conditions:

    WARNING
    WARNING texts warn against the danger
    of injury if the specified instructions are
    not followed.

    Since the policy at Saab is one of continual
    improvement, we retain the right to incorporate modifications and to alter specifications
    during production without prior notice.
    If you have any queries concerning your car,
    its equipment, the warranty conditions or
    the like, your Saab dealer will be pleased to
    help.
    Best wishes,
    Saab Automobile AB
    Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for
    any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,
    exchange parts or accessories that are not
    approved by Saab Automobile AB.
    The specifications, design particulars and illustrations included in the manual are not binding.



  • Page 3

    3

    Instrument panel

    High/low beam ________________ 75
    Parking lights __________________ 75
    Daytime running lights ___________ 75
    Changing bulbs _______________ 200

    Warning and indicator lights _____
    Tachometer __________________
    Speedometer _________________
    Odometer and trip meter ________
    Gauge showing turbo pressure ___
    Fuel gauge __________________
    Temperature gauge ____________

    60
    66
    66
    66
    67
    68
    67

    Trip computer
    (Saab Information Display, SID) __ 69
    Night panel __________________ 73
    Clock _______________________ 74
    Washers and wipers ______ 78
    Rear-window wiper _______ 79
    Replacing wiper blades __ 198

    High/low beam control stalk 75
    Direction indicators _______ 76
    Cruise Control __________ 163

    Audio system____________ 94
    CD player _____________ 100

    Rear fog light ___________ 77
    Front fog lights ___________ 77

    Hazard warning lights _____ 76

    Instrument lighting ________ 78

    Climate control system:
    manual _______________ 80
    Climate control system:
    automatic _____________ 84
    Car care ______________ 185
    IB731

    Steering-wheel-mounted
    controls, Audio System __ 106

    Ashtrays (accessory) __________ 135
    Cigarette lighter (accessory) ____ 135

    Seat heating controls ____ 129



  • Page 4

    4

    Exterior

    Driving with a roof rack load ____ 176
    Mounting of roof rack __________ 176
    Maximum loads ______________ 234

    Sunroof _______________ 132
    Convertible _____________ 48
    Washing the car ________ 220
    Waxing and polishing ____ 221
    Touching-up of paintwork _ 221
    Anticorrosion treatment ___ 222

    Hood release handle __________ 186
    Engine compartment: washing __ 220

    Headlight switches _______ 75
    High/low beam control stalk 75
    Turn signal & lane change
    indicators ______________ 76
    Headlamp wipers _______ 198
    Changing bulbs ________ 200

    Taillights ______________ 202
    Stop lights _____________ 202
    Light switches ___________ 75
    Changing bulbs _________ 200

    Central locking __________
    Interior locking buttons ____
    Trunk lock ______________
    Child safety lock catch ____
    Car alarm (Anti-theft system)

    36
    37
    40
    39
    41

    Towing ________________ 179
    Towrope attachment eyes _ 179
    Towing a trailer _________ 173

    Trunk lid lock ___________
    Lowering the rear seat ____
    Trunk _________________
    Spare wheel ___________
    Tools _________________
    Lighting _______________

    138
    138
    141
    143
    143
    202

    Tires & Rims_____________ 211 / 242
    Tire pressure ___________ back cover
    Driving in cold weather ________ 171
    Brakes and braking ___________ 164
    Compact spare wheel _________ 214
    Changing a wheel ____________ 215

    Fuel filler door __________ 151
    Refuelling _____________ 151
    Fuel grade ____________ 239
    Fuel gauge _____________ 68
    Fuel economy __________ 170



  • Page 5

    5

    Interior

    Internal rearview mirror ________ 137
    Door mirrors ________________ 137
    Vanity mirror ________________ 134

    Interior lighting switch _________ 133
    Interior lighting: changing bulbs __ 204

    Safety belts _____________ 12
    Safety-belt care ________ 218
    Airbag _________________ 28
    Child seats _____________ 19
    Child safety lock catch ____ 39

    Power steering _________ 241
    Steering-wheel adjustment 131
    Airbag _________________ 28

    Glove compartment _____ 135
    Seat adjustment ________ 124
    Safety belts _____________ 12
    Seat heating ___________ 129
    Rear seat _____________ 138
    Folding down the rear seat 138
    Child seats _____________ 19
    Upholstery: cleaning _____ 219

    IB1353

    Manual transmission ____ 155
    Automatic transmission __ 156

    Center console ______________ 130
    Electric windows _____________ 130
    Sunroof ____________________ 132
    Convertible __________________ 48
    Ignition switch _______________ 146
    Starting the engine ___________ 147
    Engine break-in period ________ 155
    Parking ____________________ 168
    Driving in hot/cold weather _____ 171



  • Page 6

    6

    Engine bay

    Engine: description ____________ 188
    Engine oil, level control
    and topping up _______________ 190
    Engine oil: changing ___________ 190
    Oil grade_____________________ 237

    Brake system ________________
    Brake fluid __________________
    Brake pads __________________
    ABS brakes _________________

    241
    194
    194
    164

    Fuse panels ___________
    Changing a fuse ________
    Table of fuses __________
    Relays _______________

    206
    206
    208
    210

    Warning labels ___________ 7
    V.I.N. number __________ 243
    Engine number _________ 243
    Gearbox number ________ 243
    Color coding ___________ 243

    Ignition system _________
    Drive belt ______________
    Alternator _____________
    Spark plugs ____________
    Catalytic converter ______
    Simple fault tracing
    (A/C, ACC) ____________

    Coolant, checking
    and topping up ________ 192
    Coolant _______________ 192
    Temperature gauge ______ 67
    Driving in hot weather ____ 173
    Driving in cold weather ___ 171

    240
    197
    197
    240
    150
    226

    Manual transmission __________
    Automatic transmission ________
    Transmission oil ______________
    Gearbox: technical data ________

    IB1624

    Turbo-compressor ________ 67
    Pressure gauge __________ 67
    Important considerations
    for driving _____________ 148
    Technical data: engine ___ 237

    191
    191
    191
    240

    Steering servo _______________ 195
    Fluid checking
    and topping up ______________ 195

    Washer fluid ___________ 199
    Topping up with fluid _____ 199
    Washer jets ___________ 199
    Wiper/washer control stalk _ 78

    Battery _____________________ 195
    Battery charge _______________ 195
    Jump starting ________________ 181



  • Page 7

    7

    Warning labels
    Drive belt:
    Radiator fan:
    The radiator fan can cut in even
    after engine has been switched off.

    Moving belt. Do not
    touch while engine
    running.

    A/C system:
    Refrigerant at high pressure.
    Do not undo or remove any connections in the A/C system
    until the system has been emptied. Working the wrong way
    may result in injury. Work on the A/C system must be left
    to qualified personnel only. For working instructions, see
    the Workshop Handbook.
    The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
    Refrigerant: 770 g of R134a.
    Compressor oil: 150 cc PAG Oil SP-10, or
    SAAB oil 4759106 SP-10.

    Battery:








    AVOID SPARKS, AVOID OPEN FLAMES, NO SMOKING
    PROTECT YOUR EYES
    KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
    ACID
    SEE MANUAL
    FLAMMABLE GAS

    • No sparks, flames or smoking.
    • Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
    • Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or servere burns.
    • Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast.
    • Do not tip battery, do not open battery.
    KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN

    Coolant:
    Never open while engine is hot.
    Escaping coolant under pressure can cause
    serious injuries.



  • Page 8

    CANADA

    IB1195

    8

    Wheel changing:
    Intended for the Saab 9-5 and 9-3. Use the jack
    only on firm, level ground. Use blocks. Max. jack
    load: 2200 lbs. (1000 kg). For further information,
    see the manual.

    USA
    AIR BAG
    WARNING
    Flip visor over

    Belt beam
    Warning for pinch risk due to
    movable parts when beam is in
    unlocked position.

    CANADA

    Long loads

    50 10 111

    USA
    WARNING
    DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur.
    • Children 12 and under can be killed by the air bag.
    • The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children.
    • NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front.
    • Sit as far back as possible from the air bag.
    • ALWAYS use SEAT BELT and CHILD RESTRAINTS

    Always SECURE LOAD to prevent it from shifting during transport.
    An unsecured load could cause passenger
    injuries in braking situations or in the event of a
    crash.
    Cover sharp edges with a protective wrap.



  • Page 9

    IB934

    9

    Soft top, Saab 9-3
    Convertible
    Push the handle in before
    driving away.
    There would otherwise be
    a risk of injury.

    Jack
    Soft top, Saab 9-3 Convertible
    Do not lean over top or sit in the rear seat
    while activated.

    Brake fluid
    Clean filler cap before removing. Use only Dot
    4 fluid from sealed container.

    – The jack is designed only for changing a tire or mounting tire snow chains.
    – Car must be level and jack must be placed on firm and
    level ground.
    – Never crawl under car while it is jacked up.
    JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
    1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to park.
    2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel that to
    be changed (See illustration).
    3 Crank jack until so that car begins to lift.
    4 Remove center cap by inserting a screw driver under
    cap prying up.
    5 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheels bolts
    one-half turn.
    6 Raise car so that tire clears ground. Loosen wheel
    bolts completely and remove wheel.
    7 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough so
    wheel is not loose.
    8 Lower car. Tighten wheel bolts in crosswise order
    (See illustration).
    Observe max. speed limit for spare tire.



  • Page 10

    10
    (This page has been left blank).



  • Page 11

    11

    Safety

    IB1885

    Safety belts......................
    Head restraint..................
    Child safety......................
    Airbag (Supplemental
    Restraint System "SRS")

    12
    18
    19
    28



  • Page 12

    Safety

    Safety belts

    The results of studies show that it is equally
    important to wear safety belts in the rear
    seat as in the front seats.

    WARNING
    Safety belts must be worn at all times by
    all car occupants. Child safety, see page
    19.
    Check that the locking tongue is properly
    locked in the belt lock.
    Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are provided for all seats.

    FASTEN BELTS
    WARNING
    In the event of a crash, the rear-seat passengers can be thrown forward against
    the front seat backrests, imposing much
    higher stresses on the front seat passengers and belts and resulting in needless
    injury to everyone in the car.

    IB1302

    12

    Safety-belt reminder
    WARNING
    For safety reasons, you should adjust
    safety belts only while the car is stationary.

    When the ignition is switched on, the ”fasten
    belts” reminder will light up until the driver
    fastens the safety belt. In addition an audible signal sounds for 6 seconds, or until the
    driver fastens his belt.



  • Page 13

    Safety
    Safety-belt pretensioners

    Correct position for safety belt

    The belts of the front seats are fitted with
    automatic pretensioners, which are activated in the event of a severe frontal crash
    or very violent rear-end crash. They serve to
    reduce the forward movement of the body
    by tensioning the belt.
    The belt pretensioners do not activate in
    less violent frontal or rear-end crashes.

    • The lap part of the belt should be pulled
    as tightly as comfortable and as low as
    possible across the hips, so that it is just
    touching the top of the thighs. The shoulder belt should be well in on the shoulder
    but not touching the neck.

    If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
    belts, belt pretensioners and other components must be inspected by an authorized Saab dealer and replaced as necessary.
    Never make any alterations or repairs to
    the safety belt yourself but visit an authorized Saab dealer.

    WARNING
    Proper positioning of the safety belt is
    extremely important. An out of position
    safety belt can result in the wearer sliding
    underneath the belt in a crash (submarining) and injury can result from the lap portion cutting into the abdomen.
    • Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted
    or rubbing against any sharp edges.
    • There should not be any slack in the belt.
    Pull the belt tight – particularly important
    when thick outer clothing is worn.

    IB816

    WARNING

    13

    Correctly positioned safety belt.
    • Refrain from tilting the backrest more than
    necessary, as the safety belt provides
    better protection when the seat is in the
    more upright position.
    • Only one person per safety belt!

    WARNING
    If two people share a belt, they risk injury
    by being crushed together in the event of
    a crash.
    • For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
    the retractor will allow the wearer freedom
    of movement. The retractor locks up automatically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
    sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
    applied hard or a crash occurs.



  • Page 14

    14

    Safety

    • Children who have grown out of a child
    seat should be restrained by the car’s
    standard three-point belts. Make sure that
    the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
    neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cushion may be necessary.

    IB1304

    Never fasten the safety belt with the
    shoulder belt behind the body or pull the
    belt off the shoulder and under the arm.

    IB1305

    WARNING

    To fasten the belt

    Front seat belts
    Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and inserting the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
    securely fastened.
    Because the lower belt-anchorage points
    are on the seat (9-3 5-door), the belt buckle
    follows the movement of the seat during
    seat adjustment. In the 9-3 Coupé and
    9-3 Convertible, the lower outer anchorage
    point is in the rear of the sill, which makes it
    all the more important that the lap strap is
    not slack during use.
    Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
    and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
    tighten the lap belt part.
    The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
    possible.

    Press the red button to release the belt.
    To release the belt, press the red button on
    the belt buckle, as illustrated.
    See page 218 for the checking of belt function, cleaning etc.



  • Page 15

    IB818

    IB819

    Safety

    The belt guide on the door pillar

    Belt height adjustment
    The belt guide on the door pillar can be set
    to five different heights.
    Set the guide as high as possible without
    causing the belt to chafe against the throat.
    In the case of a short person the guide can
    be lowered until the belt comes about an
    inch (a few centimetres) from the throat but
    still provides safe restraint.
    Raise the belt guide by pushing it upwards
    to the desired position. To lower it, the
    release button must first be depressed.
    Check that it has engaged in its new position
    by pulling up and down.

    Safety belt use during pregnancy
    Pregnant women must always wear a
    safety belt to protect both themselves and
    the unborn child.
    The lap belt should be placed low, across
    the hips and over the upper thighs.

    15



  • Page 16

    Safety

    Safety belts, rear seat (the central head restraint is an accessory)

    Safety belts, rear seat
    Three-point safety belts are provided for all
    three rear-seat passengers (2 for Convertible models).
    Fasten the belts by pulling the belt across
    you and inserting the tongue into the buckle.
    Check that it is securely fastened.
    Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
    and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
    tighten the lap belt part.
    The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
    possible.
    Press the red button on the belt buckle to
    release the belt.

    WARNING
    • Make sure that the belt does not
    become trapped when the backrest is
    folded down or raised (see page 138).
    • If you must carry an item of luggage on
    a seat, ensure that it is held securely
    by the safety belt. This will reduce the
    risk of injury by flying objects in the
    event of a crash.
    • Check that the belt is not twisted or
    lying against sharp edges.
    See page 142 for securing of load.
    See page 218 for the checking of belt function, cleaning etc.

    IB821

    IB960

    16

    Securing a load on the rear seat



  • Page 17

    Safety
    WARNING
    Safety belts are designed to bear upon
    the bony structure of the body, and should
    be worn low across the front of the pelvis
    or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
    applicable; wearing the lap section of the
    belt across the abdominal area must be
    avoided.
    Safety belts should be adjusted as firmly
    as possible, consistent with comfort, to
    provide the protection for which they have
    been designed. A loose belt will greatly
    reduce the protection afforded to the
    wearer.
    Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and
    chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
    Cleaning may safely be carried out using
    mild soap and water. The belt should be
    replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
    contaminated or damaged.
    It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe
    impact even if damage to the assembly is
    not obvious.

    Belts should not be worn with straps
    twisted.
    Each belt assembly must only be used by
    one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt
    around a child being carried on the occupant´s lap.
    No modifications or additions should be
    made by the user which will either prevent
    the safety belt adjusting device from operating to remove slack, or prevent the
    safety belt assembly from being adjusted
    to remove slack.

    17



  • Page 18

    18

    Safety

    The front seats in the Saab 9-3 are
    equipped with Saab Active Head Restraints
    (SAHRs). These reduce the risk of whiplash
    injury if the car is hit from behind.
    In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
    forced back against the backrest. This, in
    turn, causes the mechanism to press the
    head restraint forward and upward, thus limiting the backward movement of the head.
    The SAHR is a mechanical system, actuated by body weight. The mechanism is built
    into the top of the backrest, where it is connected to the head restraint.
    Because the SAHR is mechanically operated, it does not need to be replaced after a
    minor rear-end crash.

    IB400

    Head restraint

    The head restraint can be raised or lowered
    and is adjustable in various positions.
    • Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
    sides and pull it straight up.
    • Lowering: depress the catch on the
    left-hand side of the attaching point and
    press the head restraint down.

    WARNING
    Adjust the head restraint so that the head
    is well supported and the center of the
    head restraint is at ear height, thus reducing the likelihood of neck injury in a crash.



  • Page 19

    Safety

    Child safety
    WARNING
    • NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
    the front.
    • Children must
    always be suitably
    restrained in the car.
    All child restraints and
    booster seats are
    designed to be
    secured in vehicle
    seats by the lap belt of a lap-shoulder
    belt or LATCH. If the child restraint is
    not properly secured, a child can be
    injured in a crash.
    • Children 12 and under can be killed by
    the airbag.
    • According to crash statistics, the
    BACK SEAT is SAFER for properly
    restrainen children than the front seat.
    • Sit as far back as possible from the air
    bag.

    Car safety tips

    19

    Protect your children from getting
    trapped in the trunk of a car
    WARNING

    • Never leave your children unattended
    in a car, even for a short time.
    – Children can suffer heat stroke - perhaps die - in a matter of minutes.
    – Children can put the car into gear and
    hurt themselves or others.
    • At gas stations, take the keys from the
    car while filling the tank.
    • Never allow children to climb on top of or under motor vehicles.
    • Always look for children before backing
    your motor vehicle out of a garage or
    driveway.
    • To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
    never let a car idle in the garage.
    • Supervise young children around buckets of water while washing your car.
    Small children can drown in seconds in
    less than an inch of water.

    WARNING
    • Teach your kids not to play in or around
    cars.
    • Watch your children when loading or
    unloading the car so they don´t get
    locked in by mistake.
    • Always lock the doors and trunk of your
    car, and keep the keys out of children´s
    sight and reach.
    • Keep the rear fold-down seats closed
    to help prevent kids from getting into
    the trunk from inside the car.
    For Trunk Release Handle see page 39 and
    143.



  • Page 20

    Safety

    The same attention must be given to child
    safety in the car as is given to adults.
    Saab recommends rearward facing child
    restraints for children up to 3 years old.
    Children travel most safely when properly
    restrained, but restraints must be suitable
    for the size of the child. Always follow the
    child seat/booster cushion manufacturer´s
    instructions when installing these devices in
    your vehicle.
    Make sure you are acquainted with the
    legal requirements for seating children
    in the car.
    Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
    restraint in accordance with the manufacturer’s child seat instructions.
    When fitting child seats in cars you must
    always read the instructions supplied by
    the manufacturer.

    IB1683

    20

    Illustration showing lower attachments (ISOFIX) in the rear seat.
    Top tethers are located behind the head restraints, one for each seat position, see page
    23 and 24.



  • Page 21

    Safety

    21

    LATCH

    IB1899

    LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
    for CHildren) consists of top tether and
    lower anchorage bars (“ISOFIX”) for child
    restraints in the two outboard rear seats.
    ISOFIX are lower attachments located
    where the seat and back cushions come
    together. Top tether are upper attachments
    located between belt beam and parcel shelf,
    see page 23 and 24.
    Saab recommends rearward facing child
    restraints for children 3 and under.

    ISOFIX attachment points in the rear seat, 9-3 Convertible



  • Page 22

    LATCH installation
    To facilitate the proper fitting of new specially-designed child restraints rigid lower
    anchorages (ISOFIX) have been installed to
    the vehicle that shall be used with the top
    tether anchorages in the two outboard rear
    seating positions. There is an additional top
    tether anchorage for the center rear seating
    position used together with the safety belt.
    LATCH is a U.S./Canadian government
    standard for an uniform method of fitting
    child restraints without using the standard
    safety belts. Only certain child restraints are
    equipped to utilize these rigid lower anchorages behind where the seat cushion and
    seat back come together. LATCH child
    seats also utilize a top tether strap that is
    found on some newer child seats that still
    require installation with the standard safety
    belts.
    There are two bars attached to the car body
    for each specially designed LATCH child
    restraint. A small label is located on the seat
    back just above each attachment bar to
    facilitate installing the child restraint. The
    label contains a circle or a rearward facing
    child restraint.

    1 Place the child restraint on one of the
    designated outboard rear seat cushions.
    2 Press the child restraint rearward, lining
    up the restraint attachment arms with
    the labels.
    3 Follow the child restraint instructions to
    confirm that both restraint arms are
    properly attached to the bars.
    4 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
    anchorage and tighten according to the
    restraint instructions, see page 23 and
    24.
    5 Pull the child restraint to make a second
    check that restraint is securely attached
    at both the lower anchorage bars and
    the top tether strap.
    For the top tether, only use the strap supplied with the child restraint.
    Always follow the installation instructions
    supplied with the child restraint.
    The availability of LATCH child restraints is
    limited.
    Child restraints using rigid lower anchorages (ISOFIX) cannot be fitted where a integrated booster seat is installed.
    When fitting child seats in cars you must
    always read the instructions supplied by
    the car seat manufacturer.

    IB1684

    Safety

    Rigid 2-point lower attachment with top
    tether

    Semi-rigid 2-point lower attachment with
    top tether

    IB1685

    22



  • Page 23

    Safety

    23

    Child tether anchorages, Coupé and
    5-door models

    Child restraints with a tether strap must be
    anchored according to law.

    The belt anchorage beam is provided with
    three top tether anchorages. Use the one
    that is located just behind the child restraint
    and attach the restraint as follows:
    1 Open the luggage compartment.
    2 Unhook the rubber straps from the
    parcel shelf.
    3 Lift the parcel shelf slightly and pull it
    clear of the guide pins in the front edge
    of the shelf support.
    4 Fold the anchorages up as illustrated.
    5 Raise the headrest to provide access to
    the anchor. The child restraint tether
    must be routed under the headrest. To
    make it more comfortable for the child,
    the headrest may be removed.

    Child tether anchorages, Coupé and 5door models.
    6 Attach the tether to the anchorage that
    is located just behind the child restraint.
    7 Secure the lower part of the child
    restraint by means of the safety belt as
    described in the child restraint mounting
    instruction.
    8 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
    child restraint is pressed hard against
    the backrest.
    Fold the anchorages down when not in use.

    IB1362

    Child tether anchorages are designed to
    withstand only those loads imposed by
    correctly fitted child restraints.
    Under no circumstances are they to be
    used for adult safety belts.

    IB1896

    WARNING

    Child tether anchorage, Coupé and 5door models.
    The tether strap is not a part of the child
    tether anchorage.

    Forward facing child restraint in
    center rear position
    When installing a forward facing child
    restraint in the center rear position the child
    restraint must be fitted using the standard
    safety belt together with the top tether
    anchorage.



  • Page 24

    24

    Safety

    Child tether anchorages, Convertible models

    Child tether anchorages are designed to
    withstand only those loads imposed by
    correctly fitted child restraints.
    Under no circumstances are they to be
    used for adult safety belts.
    The car is provided with two top tether
    anchorages. Use the one that is right behind
    the child restraint and attach the restraint as
    follows:
    1 Lower the convertible top fully.
    2 Switch off the ignition when the top storage covers are in their straight up position.
    3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
    4 Unlock the backrest and lower it about
    8 in. (20 cm).

    IB1926

    WARNING
    Child tether anchorages, Convertible.

    5 Insert the child restraint´s upper tether
    between the bottom of the headrest and
    the top of the backrest.
    6 Run the hook and the tether over the
    cross-member behind the headrest.
    7 There are slits in the fabric where the top
    bag is joined to the cross-member.
    Insert hook and strap through the slit
    opening.
    8 Attach the tether to the anchorage. This
    might be easier if you insert your other
    hand between the backrest and the
    crossmember to help attach the tether.
    9 Raise the backrest and lock in place.
    10 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
    child restraint is pressed hard against
    the backrest. Also check that no buckle
    is positioned above the cross-member,

    IB1314

    Child restraints with a tether strap must be
    anchored according to law.

    Attaching tether strap hook to anchorage,
    Convertible.
    The tether strap is not a part of the tether
    child anchorage.

    as this could obstruct locking of the tonneau cover.
    11 Secure the lower part of the child
    restraint by means of the safety belt as
    described in the child restraint mounting
    instructions.



  • Page 25

    Safety
    Lockable belt tongue

    Installation of child restraint using
    the standard safety belt
    Child restraint that are approved for rearward facing installation in the rear seat can
    be positioned in any of the three rear places.
    Make sure that it is possible to fit it in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
    When fitting child restraints in cars you
    must always read the instructions supplied by the child seat manufacturer.
    IB822

    If fitting a child seat that is intended to be
    secured in position by the lap portion of the
    safety belt, make use of the locking function
    of the buckle.
    Locking the lap portion of the belt lessens
    the risk that the seat will work loose while
    the car is in motion.
    The button for the locking function is located
    on the back of the buckle.
    1 Position the child seat in the back of the
    car.
    2 To activate the locking function, move
    the locking button on the tongue of the
    belt to the position marked
    ”CHILD SEAT” (item 1 in the figure) in
    order to activate the locking function.
    3 Secure the base of the child seat with
    the lap portion of the safety belt in accordance with the installation instructions
    accompanying the child seat.
    4 Grasp the shoulder part of the safety belt
    and pull it upwards to tighten the lap portion against the child seat.
    5 Check for correct locking function by
    pulling on the lap portion of the belt. The
    belt must not unreel.

    25

    Locking the lap belt
    1 Locked
    2 Unlocked

    WARNING
    Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
    instructions on the use of this child
    restraint system can cause your child to
    strike the vehicle´s interior during a
    sudden stop or crash.
    Saab recommends rearward facing child
    restraints be used for children up to 3
    years of age.



  • Page 26

    26

    Safety

    Integrated booster seat
    (accessory)

    Folding down
    1 Press in the latches and lift and remove
    the car’s regular head restraint. Turn it
    180° and remount it. Make certain that it
    is locked securely in place.
    2 Lift up the booster seat’s headrest.
    3 Pull out the upper part of the opener
    strap and lower the seat itself. Make certain that it is locked in the lowered position.

    IB825

    Integrated booster seat is available as part
    of the rear seat backrest.
    This child restraint is designed for use by
    children who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs.
    (15 and 36 kg) and are between 38 and 54
    inches (970 and 1370 mm) in height.
    A child sitting in an integrated booster seat
    must use the car’s regular lap and shoulder
    belt. Regardless of the child’s weight and
    age, proper contact between child and belt
    is vital. Always make certain that the seat is
    undamaged and is kept clean so that it will
    function properly.
    This child restraint system conforms to all
    applicable motor vehicle safety standards.

    Fasten the belt
    • See that the child is seated as far back as
    possible against the back support.
    • Adjust the booster seat’s head support so
    that its center is at ear height.
    • To attach the belt, pull it out slowly and
    insert the latch plate into the buckle. Make
    certain the latch plate is properly engaged
    in the buckle.
    • The lap portion of the belt must be positioned low on the pelvis, and the shoulder
    strap must be as far in on the shoulder as
    possible without chafing against the
    child’s neck or causing discomfort.

    • The belt must contact the body firmly to
    provide the best protection. Pull up on the
    shoulder strap to tension the belt properly.
    • Make certain the belt moves freely
    between the retractor and the buckle.



  • Page 27

    Safety
    Folding booster seat
    • Pull the upper part of the release strap out
    and fold up the seat itself. Make sure that
    it is locked firmly in its folded-up position.
    • Press the booster seat’s headrest all the
    way down.
    • Press in the latches on the car’s regular
    head restraint. Remove it, rotate it 180°
    and remount it. Make certain it is locked
    correctly.

    WARNING
    • Use only the vehicle’s lap and shoulder belt system when restraining the
    child in the booster seat.
    • The seat must not be modified or
    changed in any way.
    • Never leave a child unattended.
    • The car’s regular head restraint must
    always be turned 180° back to its original position after the integrated
    booster seat is folded away.
    • Check to ensure that the belt is not
    twisted or rubbing against any sharp
    edges.
    ISOFIX child restraints can not be fitted in a
    position with integrated booster seat.

    Label on integrated booster cushion

    WARNING
    Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
    instructions on the use of this child
    restraint system can cause your child to
    strike the vehicle´s interior during a
    sudden stop or crash.

    27



  • Page 28

    Safety

    Airbag (Supplemental
    Restraint System
    "SRS")

    3

    5
    2

    4

    6
    6

    • Always wear your safety belt.
    • Always adjust your seat so that you
    are as far back as possible but still
    able to reach the steering wheel and
    controls comfortably.
    • Children 12 and under or shorter than
    55 inches (140 cm) should always
    travel in the rear as the vehicle is
    equipped with an airbag on the passenger side.
    The Supplementary Restraint System
    (SRS) comprises an airbag in the steering
    wheel, a front passenger airbag and side
    airbags in the front seats.
    The system supplements the protection
    provided by the safety belts to further
    enhance the safety of occupants.
    If a fault is detected in the SRS, the
    AIR BAG warning light on the main instrument panel will come on (see pages 62 and
    32).

    IB827

    To reduce risk of injury:

    5

    1

    WARNING

    2

    Airbag in course of inflation (driver’s side)

    SRS (airbag) system with belt
    pretensioners

    When the system is triggered by impact of a
    frontal crash, the airbags in the steering
    wheel and passenger side of the dash board
    are inflated, after which they deflate through
    vents in the back of the bags.
    The entire process takes less than
    0.1 second – literally, faster than the blinking of an eye.
    These airbags are triggered only by moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes.
    They will not be activated by minor front-end
    impacts, rear-end or side impacts, or by the
    car rolling over.
    Side airbags, see page 30.

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    IB1597

    28

    Electronic control module and sensor
    Belt pretensioners (for both front safety belts)
    Steering wheel with integral airbag
    Recess for airbag on passenger’s side
    Sensor, side airbag
    Side airbag



  • Page 29

    Safety
    Operation of the airbag in a front-end
    crash.

    WARNING
    Moment of impact.

    • Even if the car is equipped with an
    SRS (airbag), safety belts must still
    always be worn by all occupants.

    Sensor detects
    retardation and
    sends a signal via
    the control module to
    a gas generator that
    inflates the airbag.

    The inflating airbag
    cushions the driver.

    Airbag now fully
    inflated.

    IB828

    The airbag starts to
    deflate.

    • Note that because an airbag inflates
    and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
    not provide protection against a
    second impact occurring in the same
    incident. Always use your safety belt.
    • Always sit with the whole of your back
    in contact with the backrest of the seat,
    and with your seat as far back as is
    practical. This is to reduce the risk of
    injury from contact with the backrest of
    the seat when the airbag inflates and
    also because the airbag needs space
    in which to inflate.
    • Never attach anything to the steering
    wheel or passenger side of the instrument panel, as this could result in
    injury if the airbag should inflate. The
    same applies to anything you might
    have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for
    instance.
    • Some components of the airbag will
    be hot for a short time. In some circumstances the airbag can cause burns or
    abrasions to the body when the airbag
    inflates/deflates.

    29

    • Never rest your hands or forearms on
    the steering-wheel center padding.
    • If the AIR BAG warning light remains
    on after the car has been started or
    comes on while you are driving, have
    the car checked immediately by an
    authorized Saab dealer. The warning
    light could signify that the airbags may
    not inflate in a crash, or they could
    even inflate without a crash. See page
    62.



  • Page 30

    30

    Safety

    Front passenger seat
    WARNING

    Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
    the right front seat of a car equipped with
    a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag
    in the event of a crash could seriously
    injure or kill a child.
    The airbags are interconnected and have a
    common warning light, AIR BAG. The passenger airbag module is housed in the
    fascia above the glove compartment and is
    marked ”SRS AIR BAG”.
    Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
    moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
    crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccupied.

    • Never allow a child to stand in front of
    the seat or to sit on the lap of a front
    seat passenger. Serious injury or
    death could result if the airbag is
    inflated in a crash.
    • The glove compartment must be
    closed while travelling. An open glove
    compartment door could cause leg
    injuries in the event of a crash.
    • Never place anything on the dash or in
    front of the seat as, in addition to being
    a hazard to passengers, this could
    interfere with the function of the airbag
    in the event of a crash. The same
    applies to the mounting of accessories
    on the dash.
    • Keep feet on the floor - never put feet
    up on the dash, on the seat or out of
    the window.
    • Do not carry anything in your lap.

    IB986

    WARNING

    • Children 12 and under can be killed by
    the airbag.
    • The back seat is the safest place for
    children.

    Side airbag

    WARNING
    • This car is equipped with side airbags
    and no extra interior trim should be fitted. Failure to observe this warning
    could result in the side airbags not
    inflating as intended and thus not providing the intended protection either.
    • Never place any object in the area that
    would be occupied by the inflated airbag.
    • For optimum protection, sit upright in
    the seat, with your safety belt correctly
    fastened.



  • Page 31

    Safety

    31

    • The sensors for the side airbags are
    fitted in the front doors.

    • The side airbags will inflate only in the
    event of a side impact; not in the event
    of a front or rear-end crash or of the
    car’s rolling over.
    • Wear and damage to the seat cover,
    or the seat seam, in the area of the
    side airbag must immediately be
    repaired by an authorized Saab
    dealer.
    • Do not modify the speaker installation
    in the front doors or install speakers
    other than those specifically approved
    by Saab.

    Accessories and other equipment must
    not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
    these are where the airbags may inflate in
    the event of a crash.
    Side airbags are housed inside the backrests of the front seats and are designed to
    protect the driver and front passenger in the
    event of a side impact.
    In a side impact, only the airbag on that side
    will be activated, and only then if certain predetermined conditions are met such as the
    force and angle of the impact, the speed of
    the car on impact, and at which point on the
    car’s side the impact occurs.
    The sensors, which are fitted in the front
    doors, sense the rise in pressure caused by
    the door panel being pressed in during an
    impact condition. The side airbag trigger will
    be commanded based on the characteristics of this pressure rise.

    IB1707

    • Improvement of the anticorrosion
    treatment of the doors should only be
    carried out by an authorized Saab
    dealer. Otherwise there is a risk that
    the side impact sensor and the moisture barrier in the door could be damaged.

    IB1892

    • We advise against doing any work on
    the doors that could affect the moisture barrier in the door or the airbag
    sensors. It is essential that the moisture barrier (thick plastic film) in the
    front door is not damaged in any way.

    Side airbag, components
    1
    2
    3
    4

    Side airbags (SRS)
    Sensor
    Moisture barrier
    Text on seat



  • Page 32

    32

    Safety

    AIR BAG warning light
    WARNING
    • If the airbag readiness light stays on
    after you start your vehicle, it means
    the airbag system may not be working
    properly. See page 62.
    • The airbags in your vehicle may not
    inflate in a crash, or they could even
    inflate without a crash.
    • To help avoid injury to yourself or
    others, have your vehicle serviced
    right away if the airbag readiness light
    stays on after you start your vehicle.

    SRS servicing
    The SRS must be inspected as part of the
    normal service program but otherwise may
    be regarded as maintenance-free.

    Scrapping or working on airbag and
    belt pretensioners
    WARNING
    • Under no circumstances should any
    modifications be made that affect the
    steering wheel or the airbag’s electrical circuitry.
    • Before starting any welding work on
    the car, always disconnect the negative (–) battery lead and cover the conductor.
    • Airbags and belt pretensioners must
    be deployed under controlled conditions before the car is scrapped or any
    of the system’s components are
    removed. Airbags or belt pretensioners that have been deployed as a
    result of a crash must be replaced by
    new ones.
    • Airbag-system components must
    never be transferred for use in another
    vehicle.
    • All work involving the scrapping or
    replacement of airbags or belt pretensioners must only be carried out by
    knowledgeable personnel.



  • Page 33

    Safety
    Frequently asked questions on function of the airbag
    Do you still need to wear a safety belt if airbags are fitted?
    Yes, always! The airbag merely supplements the car’s normal safety system.
    Moreover, the airbag will only be actuated in
    a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
    crash, which means, of course, that it provides no protection in minor frontal crashes,
    major rear-end or side-on crashes or if the
    car rolls over.
    The safety belts help to prevent passengers
    from being thrown against each other and
    being injured.
    But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
    in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
    will make the optimum contact with the
    occupant, i.e. square on from the front. If the
    occupant meets the airbag in an offset position, the protection afforded will be reduced.
    In addition, airbags provide no protection
    against a secondary impact occurring in the
    same incident. So there is no doubt about
    the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
    times.
    Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
    room to inflate.
    The airbag inflates very quickly and powerfully in order to protect an adult person,
    before they are thrown forward, in a serious
    frontal crash.

    How do I position the seat to leave room for
    the airbag to inflate?
    Don’t have your seat too far forward.
    Recline the seat back to increase the distance between you and the airbag. For short
    drivers, special accessory pedal extensions
    are available through your Saab dealer.
    Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
    great force - to be fast enough to protect an
    adult in the seat.
    When do the airbags in the steering wheel
    and passenger side of the dash board
    inflate?
    The airbag will only be inflated under certain
    predetermined conditions in a moderate to
    severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
    depending on such factors as the force and
    angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
    impact, and the resistance to deformation of
    the impacting object.
    The airbag can only be activated once in the
    same incident.
    Do not attempt to drive the car after an
    airbag has been inflated, even if it is possible.

    33

    What won’t trigger the airbag?
    The airbag will not be activated in all
    front-end crashes. For instance, if the car
    has hit something relatively soft and yielding
    (e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid
    object at a low impact speed, the airbag will
    not necessarily be triggered.
    How loud is the inflation?
    The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
    but it is very short-lived and will not damage
    your hearing. For a short time afterwards
    you could experience a buzzing noise in
    your ears.
    Most people who have experienced it
    cannot remember the noise of the inflation
    at all - all they remember is the noise of the
    crash.
    Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
    passenger airbag is installed?
    Definitely not!
    Children 12 and under can be injured or
    killed by the airbag.
    The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for
    children.
    NEVER put a child seat in the front.



  • Page 34

    34

    Safety

    Are the smoke and fumes given off when the
    airbag operates at all harmful?
    Most people who have remained in a car
    with little or no ventilation for several minutes complained only of minor irritation of
    the throat and eyes. Avoid as much as possible getting dust on your skin as there is a
    risk of skin irritation.
    If this trouble persists, you should consult a
    doctor.
    If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
    bring on an attack, in which case you should
    follow the normal procedure advised by
    your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
    doctor afterwards.

    WARNING
    When an airbag is inflated there is dust in
    the air.
    Because the dust/smoke can, in certain
    cases, cause irritation to the skin, the following precautions should be taken:
    • As soon as possible, wash any
    exposed skin using a mild soap and
    water.
    • If there is irritation of the eyes, flush
    them liberally with clean water for at
    least 20 minutes.

    What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
    light comes on?
    If the warning light is on, it means that a fault
    has been detected in the system. The
    airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
    intended and it might even be activated
    erroneously. You should therefore take the
    car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
    possible.

    WARNING
    To reduce the risk of head injuries in the
    event of a crash, the headliner and pillar
    trims incorporate energy absorbing material (Convertible: pillar trims and header
    trims). These areas must not be modified
    in any way. Work on these areas must
    only be carried out at an authorized Saab
    dealer.



  • Page 35

    Security

    35

    Security

    IB1534

    Doors.................................
    Central locking .................
    Car alarm ..........................

    36
    36
    41



  • Page 36

    36

    Security

    Central locking

    1

    WARNING

    Door handle

    Doors
    Opening handle
    Open the door by lifting the opening handle
    from below.
    If the door is stuck (e.g. if frozen), hold the
    handle from above to secure a better grip.

    Key
    The key unit consists of a mechanical key
    with integrated remote control.
    The mechanical key is used for manual
    locking and unlocking.
    The remote control is used for remote locking and unlocking.
    The key fits all the car’s locks
    The key supplied with the car has a code
    number on a black plastic tag that needs to
    be quoted for ordering additional keys. You
    should therefore make a careful note of the
    number.
    The key contains a unique electronic code
    for your car. When the key is inserted in the
    ignition, the code is checked. If it matches,
    the car can be started.

    3

    2

    IB1524

    IB844

    Leaving children or pets unattended in a
    locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
    ignition key. A child or others could be
    badly injured or even killed.

    Remote control
    1 To lock
    2 To unlock
    3 To unlock trunk lid
    To open trunk lid (9-3 Convertible)

    Two keys are supplied with the car. It is possible to have up to four at one time that are
    coded for your car. If one is lost, contact
    your authorized Saab dealer to obtain a
    replacement. If an additional key is to be
    added, all of the original keys must be
    brought to the dealer so that the control
    module can ‘’learn” to recognize the new
    components.
    NOTE: For this reason, we strongly advise
    you to take two keys with you on long journeys and to keep them separate. If all keys
    are lost, it will be necessary to replace costly
    electronic components as well as the keys
    and remotes. This loss and replacement
    cost is not covered by the new car warranty.



  • Page 37

    Security

    37

    Locking/unlocking the car
    The key contains delicate electronics.
    • Do not expose it to water.
    • Avoid rough handling.
    • Do not place the key where it may be
    subjected to high temperatures, e.g.
    on the fascia.
    • The key may malfunction if it becomes
    very cold. Warm it in your hands for a
    couple of minutes.
    • Never open the key except to change
    the battery. For changing the battery,
    see page 39.
    To check the number of keys that are programmed for the car; see page 45.

    Electronic starting interlock
    (immobilizer)
    Each time the key is removed from the ignition, the electronic starting interlock is activated and the car is thus immobilized, see
    also page 42.

    Reprogramming lock system
    functions
    Certain lock system functions can be reprogrammed by your authorized Saab dealer;
    see page 245.

    When the car is locked and unlocked with
    the key, the theft alarm is also affected.
    Remote locking (1)
    Press
    once on the control: all doors
    lock.
    The hazard warning lights will flash once to
    confirm.
    The trunk lid cannot be opened now from
    inside using the switch on the driver’s door.

    IB1525

    NOTE

    Remote unlocking (2)
    Press
    once on the control: driver´s
    door is unlocked. Press a second time to
    unlock the rest of the doors.
    The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
    confirm.
    If unable to unlock using the remote
    control
    Unlock the door manually. If the car has an
    alarm, this will be tripped. To silence the
    alarm, insert the key into the ignition switch
    and turn it to the ON position.
    The car can now be started. Contact your
    local Saab workshop to have the system
    checked and rectified.

    Locking / unlocking by remote control
    1 To lock
    2 To unlock

    WARNING
    The remote control also works from inside
    the car. Therefore, hold the key in such a
    way that the buttons are not unintentionally pressed when the key is turned, or
    inserted or removed from the ignition
    switch.
    Otherwise, the doors may be unintentionally locked or the tailgate unlocked. On
    Convertible models, the trunk may even
    be opened.



  • Page 38

    38

    Security
    The interior locking buttons on each door
    affect only the respective door on sedan.
    The driver´s door lock button will
    lock/unlock both on the Convertible.
    If the car is left with the doors open, the interior lighting will be switched off automatically after 20 minutes, to prevent a dead
    battery.

    Central locking

    IB995

    IB1527

    WARNING

    Switch for operation of central locking

    1 To lock
    2 To unlock

    Locking by key (1)
    Turn the key clockwise: all doors and trunk
    lid locked.
    The trunk lid cannot be opened now from
    inside using the switch on the driver’s door.
    Unlocking by key (2)
    Turn the key counterclockwise once: the
    driver´s door unlocked.
    Turn the key counterclockwise twice: all
    doors, but not trunk lid, unlocked.

    The central locking can also be operated
    from inside the car by means of the
    switch on the center console (except on
    Convertibles).
    • To lock all doors: press the symbol side of
    the switch once.
    • To unlock the driver´s door: press the
    switch once.
    • To unlock all doors: press the switch
    twice.
    This switch is inoperative when the car is
    locked from the outside.

    Having the doors locked when you are
    driving will reduce the likelihood of:
    • Children, in particular, opening doors
    and falling out of the car.
    • Intruders entering the car when it is
    moving slowly or at a standstill.
    • Injury resulting from a door bursting
    open in the event of a crash.
    However, you must also remember that
    locked doors can hamper rescuers in the
    event of a crash.



  • Page 39

    Security

    39

    Changing the key battery

    Child safety lock catch

    IB1932

    IB1894

    When the battery voltage in the key falls
    below a predetermined level the SID will
    issue the following message: REPLACE
    KEY BATTERY. Press the CLEAR button
    on the SID to acknowledge this message.
    You must then replace the battery without
    delay to avoid malfunctions. The life of the
    battery is normally 4 years.Contact a Saab
    dealer to have the battery replaced.

    Trunk Release Handle

    1 Engaged
    2 Disengaged

    Child safety locks

    Trunk Release Handle

    The rear doors have child safety locks that
    are activated by a button next to the door
    latch on the end of the rear doors.
    Shift the button up or down according to the
    label on the door in question.
    When the child safety lock is in the locked
    position, the door cannot be opened from
    the inside, but can be opened from the outside.

    There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
    handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
    This handle will glow following exposure to
    light. Pull the release handle down to open
    the trunk from the inside.

    WARNING
    If small children are carried in the rear
    seat, the safety locks on rear doors
    should be activated to prevent unintentional opening from the inside.

    NOTE
    The trunk release handle was not
    designed to be used to tie down the trunk
    lid or as an anchor point when securing
    items in the trunk. Improper use of the
    trunk release could damage it.



  • Page 40

    40

    Security

    Trunk switch

    Trunk lock
    The trunk does not unlock when the other
    doors are unlocked. The trunk button on the
    driver’s door is inoperative when the car is
    locked or moving at a speed greater than
    2.7 mph (4 km/h).
    9-3 Convertible: When unlocked the bootlid
    opens slightly.

    • The
    button on the key.
    • The trunk switch on the inside of the
    driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at
    a standstill).
    • The key in the trunk lock.
    The trunk is opened using the opening
    handle above the license plate.
    Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direction indicators blinking three times.
    The unlocking button in the driver’s door is
    inoperative when the car is locked.
    If the car has an alarm, and it is armed (the
    car is locked), the alarm will sound if the
    trunk is unlocked with a key. However, if the
    trunk is opened using remote unlocking, the
    alarm will not be triggered.
    To lock
    The trunk is locked in the following ways:
    • When locking all the car’s doors with the
    button on the key.
    • With the
    switch on the center console (except on Convertible models).
    • With the key in the driver’s door.

    IB1533

    IB847

    To unlock
    The trunk is unlocked using:

    Unlocking the trunk lid with the key



  • Page 41

    Security

    Car alarm

    1
    WARNING

    The car alarm (anti-theft system) is activated/deactivated when the car is
    locked/unlocked by the key remote or by the
    key in the driver´s door.
    All of the doors plus the trunk lid and hood
    are monitored by microswitches, and window-glass sensors will trigger the alarm if
    any glass is broken.

    3

    2

    IB1524

    Leaving children or pets unattended in a
    locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
    ignition key. A child or others could be
    badly injured or even killed.

    Remote control
    1 Activate/lock
    2 Deactivate/unlock
    3 Deactivate trunk, sensors/unlock trunk lid
    To open trunk lid (9-3 Convertible)

    Electronic starting interlock (immobilizer),
    see page 42.
    The car alarm is armed 10 seconds after the
    car has been locked by the remote control.
    During this ten-second delay period, the
    doors, trunk lid and hood may still be
    opened without the alarm being triggered.
    The LED indicator on the dash will be on
    continuously during this period, at the end of
    which it will start to flash (once every third
    second) when the alarm arms.

    41

    If a door or the trunk lid or hood has been left
    open when the car is locked, the LED on the
    dash will flash (three times per second) for
    ten seconds to indicate that something is
    wrong.
    Check to ensure that all the doors, plus
    trunk lid and hood, are closed properly.
    If the fault persists (LED flashing when
    renewed attempt made to activate the car
    alarm by remote locking), lock the car using
    the key in the driver´s door instead. The car
    alarm may not have been activated and you
    should get in touch with an authorized Saab
    dealer.
    Be sure everyone using the car is familiar
    with how both the car alarm and the locking
    system work. This will avoid the alarm being
    triggered inadvertently.
    If the alarm is tripped (the direction indicators are flashing and the siren is on) it can
    be turned off by unlocking the car using the
    button.



  • Page 42

    42

    Security

    Activating the car alarm

    Window glass sensor

    The car alarm cannot be activated if the
    driver’s door is open or if the ignition switch
    is in the ON position.
    If, on the other hand, one of the other doors
    or the trunk or hood is open or opened and
    not closed again during the 10-second
    delay period, it will be excluded from the
    alarm function.
    If it is then closed, a new delay period of ten
    seconds will start, and the door (or trunk or
    hood) will once again be secured by the
    alarm system.
    As usual, the LED will be on continuously
    during the new delay period and will start to
    flash every three seconds after the 10-second period has elapsed.

    The car-alarm (anti-theft system) incorporates a sensor that monitors the window
    glass for the sound of breakage. The sensor
    is fitted inside the rear dome light (on Convertibles: in the front interior light).
    To avoid false alarms, such as the alarm
    being triggered by children or pets left inside
    the car, the sensor can be temporarily disabled.
    To disable the sensor
    To disable the sensor, first turn off the ignition and remove the key from the switch.
    Next, press and hold the NIGHT PANEL
    button until ”DOOR ALARM ONLY” appears
    on the SID and a chime sounds. The car
    alarm must now be activated within three
    minutes, or the glass sensor will become
    active again.
    The glass sensor will be enabled again
    automatically the next time the car is
    unlocked. The sensor can also be enabled
    again by repeating the procedure for disabling it. When the sensor has been
    enabled, ”FULL THEFT ALARM” will
    appear on the SID.
    If a fault is detected in the glass sensor,
    ”SERVICE THEFT ALARM” will appear on
    the SID.
    9-3 Convertible: when the car is parked
    with the soft top down, the glass sensor will
    be automatically disabled.

    Electronic starting interlock
    (immobilizer)
    When the key is inserted in the ignition, a
    signal is sent to the receiver. If the signal is
    verified, the engine can be started.
    Each time the key is removed from the ignition, the electronic immobilizer is activated.
    If a fault is detected (e.g. in the transmitter)
    ”KEY NOT ACCEPTED” will appear on the
    SID.
    In this case, you can still start the car if you
    turn the ignition key to ON and press one of
    the buttons on the key.
    Take the car to an authorized Saab dealer to
    have the system checked.
    The LED on the top of the dash double-flashes when the car is immobilized.



  • Page 43

    Security
    Alarm signals
    When the car alarm is armed, it will be triggered if any door, the trunk lid or hood, is
    opened, or if a window is broken.
    The alarm will also be triggered if an attempt
    is made to bypass or short-circuit the ignition switch, or to disconnect the battery.
    If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
    signals will be set off:
    • Flashing of hazard warning lights for five
    minutes.
    • Siren wailing for 30 seconds.
    The alarm signals will stop if the alarm is
    deactivated (car unlocked) during the alarm
    period.

    NOTE
    • It is possible to inadvertently deactivate the car alarm and at the same
    time unlock the car, if the button on the
    key is pressed by mistake when the
    car is still within its range.
    • When locking the car by remote control in extremely cold weather, it is
    advisable to check that the lock
    system has operated properly. To do
    so, check that the interior locking buttons are all down.
    If not, unlock and relock the car again.

    43

    Panic-function
    In the car alarm system is a function called
    "Panic-function".
    To activate panic function:
    • Push and hold one of the buttons on the
    key for 2 seconds, or if you are sitting
    inside the car...
    • Push the LOCK-switch on the center console for 2 seconds (not Convertibles).
    These actions will trigger the alarm (hazard
    warning lights and siren).
    To deactivate panic function:
    • Push one of the buttons on the key.
    • Push the LOCK-switch in the center console.
    • Turn the key in one of the doors or
    • Turn the ignition to ON.
    When the panic-function is activated the car
    will be locked/unlocked depending upon
    which button was pushed.
    When the ignition is ON the panic-function
    cannot be activated.



  • Page 44

    44

    Security

    Overview of functions
    Locking/
    activation

    Hazard warning lights flash once (0.5 seconds).
    Horn chirps once.
    The LED will come on for 10 seconds.

    Unlocking/
    deactivation

    Hazard warning lights flash twice.
    Horn chirps twice.
    The LED will come on for two seconds.

    Unlocking/
    deactivation of
    trunk lid alarm

    Hazard warning lights flash three times.
    Horn chirps three times.
    The LED will flash three times per second for
    10 seconds.

    Alarm triggered Hazard warning lights flash for 5 min.
    Siren wails for 30 seconds.
    To switch off the alarm, deactivate the system in
    the normal way (unlocking) by unlocking the
    door with the key or the remote
    Window-glass
    sensor

    The sensor detects if any window is broken and
    triggers the alarm.
    To disable the sensor, see page 42.

    Key

    The range of the key is normally 5-10 yds.
    (5-10 metres), although it can be substantially
    more than this in ideal conditions.
    If the key is not working, it may be because the
    code signal has not been synchronized with that
    in the control module for the car alarm. To rectify
    this, press the unlock button on the key at least
    four times in quick succession. When it is recognized, the door locks will cycle.
    If a key is lost, the new one will have to be programmed (all keys must be present) to match the
    car’s unique security code. Get in touch with an
    authorized Saab dealer.

    Battery for key

    The battery for the key will normally have a life of
    4 years. When the battery needs changing,
    ”REPLACE KEY BATTERY” will appear on the
    SID.
    Contact a Saab workshop to have the battery
    changed.

    Car-battery
    voltage

    If the battery is disconnected while the alarm is
    active (car is locked), for example during an
    attempt to steal the car, the alarm will be triggered.

    Alarm signals may differ between model variants for different countries.
    Some of the car alarm functions can be reprogrammed – consult your Saab dealer for further details (see page 245).



  • Page 45

    Security

    45

    Overview of, LED signals and SID messages
    Status

    LED signal

    Activation (during 10-second delay). Comes on for 10 seconds.
    Alarm activated (after delay).

    Flashes once every third
    second.

    Deactivation.

    Comes on for 2 seconds.

    SID message

    Reason/action

    SERVICE THEFT ALARM

    Probably a faulty sensor or siren.
    Have the car checked by an authorized Saab dealer.

    KEY NOT ACCEPTED

    Fault in key transmitter or in ignition-switch receiver. Turn ignition
    switch to ON and press one of the
    buttons on the remote control. Start
    the engine.
    Have the car checked by an authorized Saab dealer.

    Alarm not activated.

    Off.

    Door, trunk lid or hood open or
    opened during delay period.

    Flashes three times per second for 10 seconds.

    Unlocking the trunk lid.

    Flashes three times per second for 10 seconds.

    REPLACE KEY BATTERY

    Fit a new battery in the key.

    Closing of door, trunk lid or hood
    after delay period.

    Comes on for 10 seconds.

    DOOR ALARM ONLY

    Window-glass sensor is disabled.

    Car immobilized but not locked.
    Car alarm not activated.

    Flashes twice at three seconds intervals.

    FULL THEFT ALARM

    Window-glass sensor is included in
    circuit.

    Fault in a switch for doors, hood or
    trunk lid.

    Flashing (instead of being
    on continuously) during
    delay period.

    • REMOTE KEY
    • TRANSPONDR

    Turn the ignition key to the ON position and then press the button for
    opening the trunk lid. SID displays
    the number of keys (remote key) and
    transmitters (transponders) coded to
    the car.

    Some signals may differ between model variants for different
    countries.



  • Page 46

    46

    Security

    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
    is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
    cause harmful interference, and (2) must accept any interference
    received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

    Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.

    Canada only:
    This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
    not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.



  • Page 47

    Convertible

    47

    IB1361

    Convertible
    General safety instructions ................................
    Folding the soft top .........
    Raising the soft top .........
    Manual raising of the soft
    top ...................................
    Fault messages in SID.....
    Central operation of the
    windows, 9-3 Convertible
    Trunk, 9-3 Convertible .....
    Rear seat...........................
    Cleaning the soft top, 9-3
    Convertible .....................
    Interior lighting.................
    Manually opening the fuel
    filler door ........................

    48
    49
    51
    52
    54
    55
    56
    56
    57
    58
    58



  • Page 48

    48

    Convertible

    Convertible
    General safety instructions
    • Never touch the hinges and struts of the
    soft top nor the upper beam of the windshield while operating the soft top.
    • After raising the soft top, always check
    that it is properly secured to the top beam
    of the windshield with the soft top locking
    device before driving the car away.
    After folding it down you should check that
    the tonneau cover latches have engaged
    properly. Otherwise it may come loose
    while you are driving and cause injury.
    • Do not operate the soft top with passengers in the rear seat or bystanders right
    next to the car. There is a risk of head injuries while the soft top is in motion.
    • Remove child seats and children before
    operating the soft top.
    • Don’t operate the soft top in temperatures
    below 23°F (-5°C).

    • Note that certain automatic carwashes
    can do damage to fabric soft tops. This
    applies to carwashes that use mechanical
    feelers bearing against the body. We
    advise against washing a Saab 9-3 Convertible in automatic carwashes.
    • Note that certain automatic car washes
    can cause water to leak in places that normally would not leak. Do not direct high
    pressure streams of water at the seals for
    the convertible top.
    • Roof racks and ski holders must not be
    mounted on the soft top.
    • Under no circumstances should anything
    be put into the storage space for the soft
    top (under the tonneau cover) since this
    could cause obstruction when the soft top
    is being folded away.
    • See that no luggage is resting against the
    soft top stowage space since this could
    interfere with the rasing and folding of the
    soft top.

    • When the soft top is being operated, lowering or raising should be completed. Do
    not leave the soft top partially raised or
    lowered: after 20 seconds it will quickly
    "settle down" when the hydraulic pressure is automatically released.
    • It is important that the telescopic locking
    handle is completely pushed in when the
    soft top is closed.
    • Fold down any auxilliary mounted
    antenna before raising the top to avoid
    possible antenna or top damage (e.g.,
    OnStar cellular antenna on windshield of
    Convertible).



  • Page 49

    Convertible

    49

    Folding the soft top
    Before operating the soft top, read through
    the section ” General safety instructions” on
    page 48.

    WARNING
    • Do not touch the hinges or struts of the
    soft top during folding, because of the
    pinch hazard.
    • Do not operate the soft top with passengers in the rear seat or bystanders
    right next to the car, because of the
    risk of head injuries.

    NOTE
    If you drive away while the soft top is
    being raised or lowered it will stop when
    the car exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). The
    motion of the car and the resulting wind
    can seriously damage the components of
    the soft top system and may cause personal injury.

    IB837

    • After lowering the top, make sure the
    soft top cover has locked properly.

    Locking handle
    1 Pull the handle out
    2 Unfasten the hooks

    1 Start the engine and let it idle.
    2 Release the locking handle to free the
    two hooks.
    • Pull the handle straight backwards.
    • Pull the handle down, releasing the
    hooks.
    • Raise the handle up.



  • Page 50

    50

    Convertible

    IB839

    IB838

    1 The rear window is raised.
    2 The tonneau cover is
    opened.

    3 Roof and rear window are
    folded down.

    Switch for operating the soft top

    3 Slide the ROOF button backwards until
    the soft top is completely folded away,
    the tonneau cover is closed and the SID
    has given an OK signal (beep). Slide
    the ROOF button backwards a second
    time to lower the windows.
    4 Check that there are no fault messages
    on the SID; see page 54.

    IB936

    1 Lowering
    2 Raising

    4 Tonneau cover is closed.

    NOTE

    IB937

    After folding the top down you should
    check that the front of the tonneau cover
    is locked at the front on both sides before
    driving away. If an error message is displayed, see page 54.



  • Page 51

    Convertible

    51

    1
    4

    2
    IB840

    3

    Raising the soft top
    WARNING
    • Do not touch the hinges or struts of the
    soft top during rasing the top, because
    of the danger of being injured.
    • Do not operate the soft top with passengers in the rear seat or bystanders
    right next to the car, because of the
    risk of head injuries.

    IB841

    The front-edge locking of the tonneau
    cover

    Locking handle
    1 Pull the handle out and lift it
    2 Push the handle in

    1 Start the engine and let it idle.
    2 Slide the ROOF button forward until the
    5th bow is locked in the tonneau cover
    and the SID has given an OK signal
    (beep). The top must be locked within
    20 seconds. If this is not done the soft
    top will lift an inch or two (a few centimeters. In this case, slide the ROOF button
    forward again until the SID gives an OK
    signal. Lock the soft top with the locking
    handle.
    Note that all side windows will be automatically lowered an inch or two (a few
    centimetres) so as to protect the seal

    strips when the soft top is raised.
    The window operation is bypassed
    throughout the raising cycle to prevent
    the windows being raised.
    3 Pull the front end of the soft top down
    with the aid of the closing handle and
    lock the soft top by rotating the locking
    handle up.
    • Pull the handle down.
    • Rotate the handle upwards, the soft top
    will be locked.
    • Push the handle in.
    Check that the hooks have locked the soft
    top.



  • Page 52

    52

    Convertible

    4 Raise the side windows by sliding the
    ROOF button forward a second time.
    Alternatively, use the central operating
    switch for the side windows.
    5 Check that there are no fault messages
    on the SID; see page 54.

    Manual raising of the
    soft top
    Manual operation of the soft top must be
    resorted to only to raise it in an emergency (e.g. in case of an electrical or
    hydraulic fault).
    After manual raising the soft top must on
    no account be folded down manually,
    since this could cause damage to the soft
    top mechanism.
    Points 6 to 8 are only valid if the soft top is
    operated manually when the soft top tonneau is locked.

    IB938

    IB842

    WARNING
    Valve for manual raising of the soft top

    Tool fitted for manual unlocking (1) or
    locking (2) of the tonneau cover

    1 Tip the backrests of the front seats forward.
    2 Unlock the rear-seat backrest with the
    ignition key just outboard of the left rear
    headrest and tip it forward.
    3 Remove the round rubber cover over the
    hydraulic valve.
    4 Open the valve about half a turn anticlockwise.
    5 Open the trunk lid.
    6 Take out the wheel lug wrench.
    7 In the soft top tonneau mechanism and
    inside the trunk lining on the right-hand
    side, is a hole into which the straight part
    of the tool is to be inserted; see the figure.

    8 Unlock the tonneau cover by pulling the
    tool backwards. The cover should lift
    half an inch or so (a centimeter or so).
    Remove the tool. Close the trunk lid.



  • Page 53

    53

    IB939

    Convertible

    Manual raising of the soft top
    9 (ill. 1) Stand at the side of the car and
    open the tonneau cover by grasping its
    black part.
    10 (ill. 2) Get into the car and stand on the
    lowered backrest.

    ing at the side of the car, raise the 5th
    bow (rear window).
    13 Stand at the side of the car and close the
    tonneau cover.

    NOTE
    WARNING
    Do not touch the hinges and struts of the
    soft top during raising. Keep your hands
    clear of the upper beam of the windshield
    - this is a pinch hazard area. Do not operate the soft top with passengers in the
    rear seat or with bystanders right next to
    the car.
    11 (ill. 3) Take hold of the handle and pull
    the soft top up.
    12 Climb down onto the floor and pull the
    soft top towards the windshield. Stand-

    Close the cover carefully so as not to
    damage the small flaps in the front.
    14 Tip down the 5th bow/rear window as far
    as possible.
    Note: In manual raising it is not possible
    to completely secure the 5th bow in the
    latches of the tonneau cover.
    15 Shut the valve of the hydraulic system,
    without making it too tight. Replace the
    cover over it. Raise the rear-seat backrest again. See that the safety belts don’t

    get caught. Be sure the seat back locks
    in place on both sides.
    16 Sit down in the front seat, open the
    handle and lock the soft top to the windshield beam. Make sure that the hooks
    engage in the beam.
    17 In the trunk: replace the tool in the soft
    top mechanism and lock the soft top tonneau by pushing the tool forward until
    the stop point.
    18 Take the tool out.
    The soft top system must be checked and
    repaired by an authorized Saab dealer as
    quickly as possible.



  • Page 54

    54

    Convertible

    Fault messages in SID
    The following CHECK messages are
    included in the soft top system and can be
    displayed on the SID together with a beep.
    SID displays

    Cause

    Action

    CHECK SOFT • The soft top storage bag is hooked up.
    TOP STORAGE • An item in the trunk under the soft top is
    obstructing the soft top.

    • Unhook and lower the soft top storage bag, see page 56.
    • Make sure that no item in the trunk is lying against the soft top
    storage.

    CLOSE TRUNK • The raising or lowering of the soft top is
    obstructed because the trunk lid is not closed.
    LID

    • Close the trunk lid so it is latched securely.

    CHECK SOFT
    TOP LATCHES

    • The soft top is not latched to the top beam of the • Lock the soft top with the locking handle, see page 51.
    windshield.
    • Release the soft top with the locking handle, see page 49.
    • Somebody is trying to lower the soft top while it
    is still locked to the windshield beam.

    FINISH SOFT
    TOP MOTION

    • Raising or lowering was stopped before the
    cycle completed.

    • Finish the soft top motion completely.

    CHECK SOFT
    TOP COVER

    • The soft top cover is not being locked.
    • The soft top cover doesn’t open.

    • Make sure that the valve for manual raising of the soft top is
    closed, see page 52.
    • Try to slide the ROOF button backwards once more.

    SOFT TOP FAIL- • Serious fault in soft top mechanism.
    URE

    CHECK SOFT
    TOP

    • Try to slide the ROOF button once more.
    • BE VERY CAREFUL AND MAKE SURE THAT NOTHING IS
    OBSTRUCTING THE OPERATION OF THE SOFT TOP.
    Remove anything that can obstruct the operation of the soft top.
    • Operate the soft top manually, see page 52.

    • Something is in the way and is obstructing the
    • Try to slide the ROOF button once more.
    operation of the soft top by the electro-hydrau- • BE VERY CAREFUL AND MAKE SURE THAT NOTHING IS
    lics.
    OBSTRUCTING THE OPERATION OF THE SOFT TOP.
    • The soft top cover has not locked at the front on Remove anything that can obstruct the operation of the soft top.
    both sides.
    • The 5th bow (rear window) has not locked to the
    soft top cover on both sides.



  • Page 55

    Convertible

    Central operation of the
    windows,
    9-3 Convertible
    WARNING
    Remember the risk of personal injury
    when raising the windows. Check that all
    persons travelling in the car have their
    head, hands and fingers away from the
    windows before raising them.
    On the center console is a switch (see illustration) for the simultaneous closing or
    opening of the four side windows.
    Using the ROOF-button
    When folding the soft top down, you can
    lower all windows by continuing to hold the
    ROOF button backwards after the soft top
    has been folded down.
    When the soft top is being raised, all side
    windows are automatically lowered an inch
    or two (a few centimetres) to protect their
    seals. After the "beep" is heard, the hooks
    of the soft top have been secured to the
    windshield beam, hold the ROOF switch forward again and all 4 windows will close.

    IB301

    The following fuses should be checked if the
    soft top cannot be operated and no fault
    messages are shown by the SID:
    • MAXI-fuse 5 in the engine bay, see page
    207.
    • 7, 14, 21 and 23 in the fuse panel on the
    end of the instrument panel, see page
    208.

    55

    Switch for central operation of the windows, Convertible



  • Page 56

    56

    Convertible
    Trunk lid lock
    Unlocking the trunk lid by using the remote
    trunk release button on the driver’s door is
    possible only when the top is fully lowered
    or raised (note that the ignition must be in
    position ON when the top is lowered).
    The trunk button on the driver’s door is inoperative when the car is locked.

    Suspending top bag

    Trunk, 9-3 Convertible
    Hooking up top storage bag
    More space in the trunk can be obtained by
    lifting the top storage bag up by the straps
    under it and hooking them in the eyelets at
    the top of the bag.
    The top storage bag can only be hooked up
    in this way when the top is raised. If you
    attempt to lower the top while the bag is
    hooked up, the SID will display the message
    "CHECK SOFT TOP STORAGE"; see page
    54.

    If the trunk lid is opened by unlocking it
    with the key when the top is not fully raised
    or lowered, damage to the trunk lid and/or
    top system could result.

    IB856

    IB855

    NOTE

    Lock for rear backrest cushion

    Rear seat

    Lowering the rear seatback

    The rear seat is intended for two passengers.
    The two rear seat positions have three-point
    safety belts with inertia reels.

    To increase the load-carrying capacity of
    the car, the rear seatback can be folded forward. This will be easier if the front seats are
    not too far back.
    1 Pass the rear safety belts under the
    black handles at both ends of the backrest. This prevents the safety belts from
    becoming caught when the seatback is
    raised again.
    2 The seatback is fitted with a lock at the
    top near the left rear head restraint. Use
    the ignition key to unlock the entire backrest. Remove the key.
    3 Lower the seatback. (If using child seat
    top tether strap, detach from anchorage
    in trunk prior to lowering the seatback.).

    Trunk Pass-Through in the rear



  • Page 57

    Convertible

    Cleaning the soft top, 9-3
    Convertible

    seatback for long, narrow loads
    A trunk pass-through is provided in the rear
    seatback support so that long narrow
    objects can be carried. Before using this
    trunk pass-through, the rear seatback must
    be lowered.
    Suspend the top storage bag by means of
    the hooks as previously described on page.
    56.

    NOTE

    IB857

    NOTE
    The trunk pass-through can only be used
    when the top is raised.
    If you attempt to lower the top with the top
    storage bag suspended from the hooks or
    with a load pressing against the top storage bag, the SID will display the message
    "CHECK SOFT TOP STORAGE" (see
    page 54).

    57

    Pass through for long loads

    • Note that some automatic car washes
    can damage a textile soft top. This
    applies to washes that have mechanical feelers in contact with the bodywork.
    We advise against washing a Saab
    9-3 Convertible in automatic car
    washes.
    • Park in the shade if possible. Long
    standing in strong sunlight can affect
    the color and material of the soft top.
    • Never use strong bleaches or abrasive cleaning agents, since they can
    damage the textile soft top.
    • Wash bird droppings off at once, since
    they can have a corrosive effect on the
    textile soft top and paint.
    • During prolonged parking, especially
    winter storage, the soft top should be
    up to give optimum airing of the fabric.
    • Do not wash the fabric soft-top with a
    high-pressure jet.
    • Strong detergents and solvents can
    damage the flame retardant treatment
    of the soft top.



  • Page 58

    Convertible

    Use mild soap, lukewarm water and a
    sponge for washing.
    Rinse the top thoroughly with plain water to
    get rid of all the soap. Flush the cleaning
    agent off the bodywork as well, since it can
    cause discoloration if it is left to dry on the
    paintwork.
    If further cleaning is needed after soap and
    water have been used, a mild shampoo may
    be employed. First rinse the soft top, then
    use shampoo on the complete top and
    scrub with a small soft hand brush.
    Add water as needed until the cleaning
    agent lathers. Use a rag or sponge to
    remove dirt, so as to avoid working it into the
    cloth. Thoroughly rinse the whole car with
    plain water and make sure that cleaning
    agents are not allowed to dry on the paintwork.

    NOTE
    After washing, the soft top must be given
    time to dry completely before being folded
    down. A wet or damp top that is folded
    down can be damaged by mold.

    Cleaning the rear window
    The rear window can be cleaned with a
    window cleaner or a mild soap solution and
    a soft, anti-static cloth.
    Since the rear window is made of glass,
    when necessary, you can use an ice
    scraper on the outside. Never use a scraper
    on the inside!

    Interior lighting
    The front light is located on the front roof rail.
    The rear lighting consists of two lights built
    in to the side panels adjacent to the rear
    seat. The switch is on the center console
    between the front seats, see also page 133.
    Certain variants have a mirror and lighting
    built into the sun visors.

    IB861

    58

    Wire for manual opening of fuel filler door
    (Convertible)

    Manually opening the
    fuel filler door
    Convertible
    If the fuel filler door, controlled by the central
    lock, does not unlock take the following
    action:
    Check fuse 25. If it is defective or blows
    again after changing, the locking motor can
    be detached from the flap by pulling a wire.
    The wire, marked with a yellow arrow at the
    end, is located in the trunk inside the opening in the upholstery in front of the
    right-hand rear light.



  • Page 59

    59

    Instruments and
    controls

    IB1935

    Warning and indicator
    lights ...............................
    Instruments ......................
    Trip computer SID............
    Switches ...........................
    Wipers and washers ........
    Manual climate-control
    system.............................
    Automatic climate control
    (ACC) ...............................

    60
    66
    69
    75
    78
    80
    84



  • Page 60

    60

    Instruments and controls

    Warning and
    indicator lights

    Main instrument panel

    2

    3
    40

    9

    60

    80

    100

    120

    80

    140

    90

    Warning, oil pressure (engine oil)

    100
    180
    110
    200
    120
    220
    260 240
    130
    140
    150
    160
    160

    7

    8

    Main instrument panel
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    Tachometer
    Indicator and warning lights
    Speedometer
    Indicator and warning lights
    Pressure gauge

    A number of warning and indicator lights will
    come on when the ignition is switched on
    prior to starting (see page 65). Under
    normal conditions, these should go out a
    few seconds after the engine has started.

    5

    70

    40
    20

    10

    50
    60

    30
    20

    4

    6
    7
    8
    9

    Fuel gauge
    Engine temperature gauge
    Trip meter reset button
    Odometer and trip meter

    6

    IB1889

    1

    This symbol comes on together with
    if
    the oil pressure in the engine is too low. If
    the symbol flashes or comes on while you
    are driving, stop as soon as possible and
    where it is safe to do so, switch off the
    engine and check the engine oil level, see
    page 190.

    NOTE
    The car must not be driven under any circumstances when the warning lamp is on.
    Too low oil pressure will damage the
    engine.



  • Page 61

    Instruments and controls

    Warning charging
    This light comes on together with
    if the
    battery is not charging. If it comes on while
    you are driving, stop the car as soon as possible and switch off the engine.
    Check the alternator drive belt (see page
    197). If the belt has broken, the engine may
    overheat (cooling system will not function
    properly), the battery will not be charged,
    the A/C compressor will not run and power
    assistance for the steeering will be lost.

    Brake warning light
    This light should come on briefly when you
    turn the ignition key to ON. If it doesn´t come
    on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
    you if there is a problem.
    The brake warning light will come on
    together with
    if there is insufficient
    brake fluid in the reservoir, see page 194.
    If the ABS warning light is on at the same
    time, the ABS system may be inoperative
    because of a fault (see Anti-lock brake
    warning, see page 62).

    WARNING
    Never drive the car when these warning
    lights are on. Danger of brake failure!
    Have the brake system checked at once
    by an authorized Saab dealer.

    61

    Parking brake warning
    light
    The light will show when the parking brake
    is on (see page 168.)
    If the car driven with the parking brake on,
    will also come on and a chime will
    sound.
    The parking brake is mechanical and operates on the rear wheels.

    WARNING
    • Always apply the parking brake when
    parking, see page 168.
    • Always apply the parking brake before
    removing the ignition key.
    • Do not apply the parking brake while
    the car is moving.



  • Page 62

    62

    Instruments and controls

    Anti-lock brake warning
    This light will come on if a fault has occurred
    in the ABS system.
    On certain variants

    and

    as well

    as
    can light up to indicate a fault in the
    electronic brake force distribution system
    (distribution of the brake pressure between
    the front and rear wheels).
    Conventional braking without the ABS function will still be available.
    For safety reasons, stop the car and check
    the level of the brake fluid (see page 194).
    If the level is normal, depress the brake
    pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
    the level again. If the level is still normal, you
    may drive the car, with considerable caution, to the nearest authorized Saab dealer
    to have the brake system checked.

    WARNING
    • If the ABS is inoperative, there is a
    danger of the rear wheels locking up
    on hard braking
    • If the level of brake fluid in the reservoir is below the MIN mark, the car
    should be towed to an authorized
    Saab dealer

    Airbag warning light
    This light together with
    will come on if
    a potentially serious fault has occurred in
    the airbag system.

    WARNING
    • If the airbag readiness light stays on
    after you start your vehicle, it means
    the airbag system may not be working
    properly. One or more of the following
    conditions may occur:
    - Non-deployment of the airbags in the
    event of a crash.
    - Deployment of the airbags without a
    crash.
    - Deployment of the airbags in
    crashes less severe than intended.
    • To help avoid injury to yourself or
    others, have your vehicle serviced
    right away if the airbag readiness light
    stays on after you start your vehicle.
    This light will come on for about three seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
    the Start or Drive position. It should go out
    after the engine has started.

    Indicator, fuel
    This light comes on when there is less than
    about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) of fuel left in the
    tank.

    NOTE
    If the car runs out of fuel, air can have
    been drawn in with the fuel, which, in turn,
    can cause the catalytic converter to be
    damaged by overheating.



  • Page 63

    Instruments and controls

    Central warning light
    This light comes on and a chime will sound
    if a fault has been detected in any system
    that is critical to safety. Any of the following
    can activate the central warning light and
    alarm:







    Airbag system.
    Low oil pressure in engine.
    Parking brake is on (when car is moving).
    Brake fluid level low.
    Fault detected in ABS system.
    Electronic brake force distribution (distribution of brake pressure between front
    and rear wheels).
    • Engine overheating.
    • Alternator not charging properly.

    Cruise Control
    indicator light
    The symbol is lit when cruise control is
    active.

    Engine malfunction
    (CHECK ENGINE)
    WARNING
    An illuminated CHECK ENGINE indicator
    light indicates a serious engine-related
    problem. While your car may be able to be
    driven with the CHECK ENGINE indicator
    light illuminated (limp-home mode), you
    are advised to have your car serviced at
    an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
    possible.
    Continued driving without this problem
    being corrected might cause serious further damage to your car and create
    unsafe driving conditions. The operator
    should be prepared to take action if such
    unsafe conditions arise (e.g., apply the
    brakes, disengage transmission, turn off
    the ignition etc.).

    63

    This light indicates a malfunction in the
    fuel-injection or ignition system. The car
    may still be driven with care and with somewhat diminished performance.

    NOTE
    The car should be checked immediately
    at an authorized Saab dealer to prevent
    more serious faults from arising.

    SPORT Mode Indicator
    (automatic transmission)
    On cars with automatic transmission the
    indicator light comes on when you press the
    SPORT button on the gear-lever knob.
    In SPORT mode, the transmission remains
    longer in the (D, 3, 2, 1) gears before
    upshifting.
    Cancel Sport mode by again depressing the
    SPORT button; see also page 162.



  • Page 64

    64

    Instruments and controls
    WINTER Mode Indicator
    (automatic transmission)

    On cars with automatic transmission the
    indicator light comes on when, in the D position, you press the WINTER button on the
    center console next to the gear selector.
    When the car is in the Winter mode it starts
    in 3rd gear, which gives a better grip in
    slippery conditions by reducing the tendency to spin the wheels.
    Cancel Winter mode by again depressing
    the WINTER button; see also page 162.

    CHECK message
    indicator
    This light indicates that there is a message
    in the SID. A chime will also sound
    (see page 72).

    Automatic transmission
    fault indicator
    On a car with an automatic transmission,
    this warning symbol is illuminated if a fault
    has been detected in the transmission.
    Switch the ignition off and on again to check
    if the fault persists.
    Even if the fault persists, it is still possible in
    most cases to drive the car.
    Have the automatic transmission checked
    by an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
    possible.

    NOTE
    If the control module has actuated the
    Limp-home function for the automatic
    transmission, the car will remain in 4th
    gear when D and 3rd are selected,
    making it very sluggish. To overcome
    this, select position 2 to prevent unnecessary wear on the transmission. The transmission then starts in 3rd gear. When the
    car is moving you can select position D
    or 3.
    When the indicator light is on, the car
    must not be driven with a trailer attached.

    Rear fog light Indicator
    This light shows when the rear fog light is on
    (see page 77).
    The rear fog light is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off. When
    the fog light is next needed, it will have to be
    switched on manually again.

    High beam Indicator
    The symbol is lit when the high beam
    is on.

    Open door Indicator
    If a door has not been closed properly, the
    pictogram will indicate the door concerned
    (or trunk).



  • Page 65

    Instruments and controls

    The
    lamp in the tachometer lights up
    when the TCS system is activated, i.e. when
    the friction between the tires and road
    surface is insufficient for the car to accelerate as desired. You may also experience
    that the engine does not respond as normal
    when the accelerator is depressed.
    Operation of the TCS indicates reduced
    cohesion between the tires and the road,
    and that extra care should be taken by the
    driver.
    During normal driving, the TCS will help to
    improve both ride comfort and safety, but
    must not be regarded as a system to enable
    the driver to maintain a higher speed. The
    same precautions for safe cornering and
    driving on slippery roads must still be
    adopted (see page 166.

    Traction Control System
    OFF indicator (option)
    This light comes on when the traction
    control system (TCS) is switched off with the
    TCS button.
    IMPORTANT! The traction control system is
    switched on automatically each time the car
    is started (see page 166).
    This indicator light also comes on if a fault
    has been detected in the TCS, in which case
    the lamp will not be extinguished when the
    TCS is switched off by means of the TCS
    button. If a fault is indicated, have the
    system checked at an authorized Saab
    workshop.
    See also the section Traction Control System, on page 166.

    IB1922

    Traction Control System
    indicator (option)

    65

    1 Cars with automatic transmission

    Autochecking of lights,
    main instrument panel
    The above warning and indicator lights
    should come on when the ignition is
    switched on. They go out after about 3 seconds.
    The following lamps light up until the engine
    starts, as long as no faults exist:
    Central warning light

    .

    Oil pressure warning light
    Charge warning light

    .
    .



  • Page 66

    Instruments
    Tachometer
    The tachometer indicates the engine speed
    in thousands of revolutions per minute. The
    needle may be allowed to enter the broken
    red zone on the dial only for an instant.
    A safety cut-out function (in the fuel system)
    prevents the engine speed exceeding
    approximately 6,200 rpm (2.0 Turbo) and
    6,400 rpm (2.3 Turbo).

    IB341

    IB1850

    Instruments and controls

    IB340

    66

    Odometer and trip meter
    The odometer records the distance travelled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian vehicles the distance indicated is in
    kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and
    tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres
    on Canadian vehicles).

    Reset button
    The button is located close to the right of the
    odometer and trip meter in the main instrument panel.
    The reset button has two functions, determined by whether the ignition is ON or OFF.
    • When the ignition is ON, the button will
    reset the trip meter.
    • When the ignition is OFF, the button will
    bring up the display for 20 seconds to
    allow the odometer and trip-meter readings to be viewed. Press once more within
    20 seconds to reset the trip meter.

    Speedometer (U.S. speedometer
    shown)
    The speedometer receives signals from a
    wheel sensor in the ABS system.
    If the NIGHT PANEL mode has been
    selected, the scale will be illuminated up to
    87 mph (140 km/h). The remainder of the
    scale will be illuminated if the speed of the
    car exceeds 84 mph (135 km/h).



  • Page 67

    Temperature gauge
    The temperature gauge shows the temperature of the coolant. The needle should be
    in the middle of the scale when the engine
    is at normal operating temperature.
    If the needle enters the red zone, the
    warning light will come on and an alarm
    chime will sound.

    If the needle approaches the red zone,
    which can occur in very hot weather or when
    the engine is under a heavy load, drive in the
    highest gear possible, keep the engine revs
    low and avoid shifting down.
    Check fuse 3 (radiator fan) in the fuse panel
    under the hood, see page 210.
    If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,
    stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and
    check the coolant level by looking at the
    level visible through the plastic tank - do not
    remove the cap.

    NOTE

    67

    IB344

    IB343

    Instruments and controls

    Pressure gauge

    If the needle, despite the above action,
    enters the red zone, stop the car immediately.
    If the needle stays in the red zone, turn off
    the engine.
    If the coolant level falls below the MIN mark,
    the SID will display the message ”FILL
    COOLANT FLUID”.

    WARNING
    Never open the coolant expansion tank
    cap when the engine is hot. It contains hot
    coolant under pressure. Failure to heed
    this warning may result in personal injury.

    The turbo gauge indicates the air volume for
    combustion, which is equivalent to the
    engine load.
    At low loads, the needle will move within the
    white zone. At higher loads and during
    heavy acceleration, the needle will enter the
    yellow area. At very high loads (certain variants only) the needle may enter the first part
    of the red zone without indicating that there
    is a fault.



  • Page 68

    Under certain barometric conditions the
    needle may enter the first part of the red
    zone without necessarily indicating that a
    fault has arisen.
    If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
    and the engine at the same time loses
    power, because the monitoring system is
    holding the charging pressure down, you
    should contact an authorized Saab dealer.
    If the speed exceeds 143 mph (230 km/h),
    the increase in speed will be limited by the
    lowering of the boost pressure. The pressure gauge then moves towards the middle
    of the orange zone, indicating reduced
    engine output and thus reduces the speed
    of the car as well.

    Fuel gauge
    The fuel-tank capacity is 17.0 gal. (64 liters).
    The fuel gauge shows the amount of fuel left
    in the tank. When this is down to about
    2.5 gal. (10 liters), a warning light on the
    main instrument panel will come on (see
    page 62).
    Use the Saab Information display (SID) to
    check the approximate distance that can be
    travelled on the remaining fuel
    (see page 69).
    Refueling; see page 151.

    IB1280

    Instruments and controls

    IB345

    68

    Gear selector indication
    (cars with automatic transmission)
    An indicator showing which gear is selected
    is situated in the main instrument panel.



  • Page 69

    Instruments and controls

    Trip computer SID

    Outside temperature
    (Frost warning)

    (Saab Information Display)

    IB744

    WARNING
    It is strongly recommended that the SID
    settings be changed only when the car is
    stationary. The driver’s attention can otherwise easily be distracted from the road.

    69

    SID 3 (SCC, Saab Car Computer)

    SID (SCC)

    Regardless of what function you have
    selected, SID automatically switches to the
    outside-temperature function when the temperature is between 26° and 38°F (-3° and
    +3°C), and also when temperature is
    selected and it has been outside the range
    from 21° to 43°F (-6°C to +6°C) and again
    enters the range between 26° and 38°F
    (-3°C and +3°C).

    Selecting the function
    The car is equipped with SID (Saab
    Information Display). This instrument contains a varying number of functions depending on the standard of equipment and the
    model variant.
    SID displays CHECK messages and has
    eight trip-computer functions; see page 69.

    Use the
    button to scroll through the
    following functions:
    DIST

    Distance to destination / Trip
    meter.

    ARRIV

    Estimated time of arrival.

    ALARM

    Alarm function.

    SPD W

    Speed warning (chime).

    Use the
    button to scroll through the
    following functions:
    TEMP

    Outdoor temperature and Date.

    D.T.E.

    Estimated range (distance to
    empty fuel tank).

    FUEL Ø

    Average fuel consumption
    since function last reset.

    SPD Ø

    Average speed since function
    last reset.

    WARNING
    Remember that roads can be icy even at
    temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
    especially on bridges and stretches of
    road that are sheltered from the sun.



  • Page 70

    70

    Instruments and controls

    Entering values for the functions

    Setting the date

    Values can be entered for the following
    functions: SPD ∅ (SPEED AVERAGE),
    DIST, ARRIV, ALARM and SPD W.
    1 Select the desired function using

    or

    .
    2 Press the SET button for at least one
    second (figures start to flash and a
    chime sounds).
    3 Use
    or
    to increase or decrease
    the value (press CLR to reset).
    4 Press SET to record the value.

    1 Use
    to select TEMP/DATE.
    2 Press the SET button for at least one
    second (year starts to flash and a chime
    sounds).
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    Set the year using
    or
    .
    Touch SET.
    Set the month in the same way.
    Touch SET.
    Set the day in the same way.
    Press SET to save the date setting.

    Average fuel consumption
    The average fuel consumption is calculated
    using the values for fuel consumed and distance driven since last reset. This value is
    stored in the car’s trip computer even when
    the engine is switched off.
    • Select FUEL Ø with
    .
    To reset the value, press the CLEAR button
    for 4 seconds. A chime will be heard and
    CLEARED will be displayed.

    Turning the Alarm and Speed
    warning on or off
    1 Select the Alarm or Speed-warning
    function.
    2 Press SET to turn on the function.
    Press CLR to turn off the function.
    When either function is on, an asterisk * will
    be visible on the far right of the display. The
    function will be visible even if another function has been selected.
    The Alarm and Speed-warning settings will
    not be cancelled when the engine is
    switched off.
    When the Alarm has been set to come on at
    a specified time, it will only be activated
    once – it will not come on at the same time
    every day. Press SET to turn it on again.
    The Alarm will continue to beep for one
    minute if not switched off.



  • Page 71

    Instruments and controls
    Calculation of arrival time and
    average speed

    Using DIST as a trip meter

    The settings must be made before the journey is started.
    Calculation of arrival time:
    1 Select DIST using the
    button.
    2 Hold SET until display starts flashing.
    3 Set the destination distance using

    or

    .
    4 Press SET to store settings.
    When ARRIV is selected during the journey,
    the arrival time based on the average speed
    over the past 20 minutes will be displayed.
    The trip computer will include any stops in
    the calculation of the estimated time of
    arrival.
    Press DIST and the distance remaining to
    the destination will be displayed in the same
    way.
    After the distance to destination has
    decreased to zero, the DIST will function as
    a trip meter (see ”Using DIST as a trip
    meter”). The starting value for the trip meter
    will be the last distance set in the DIST
    function.
    Example: The DIST setting was 100 miles.
    Once 100 miles (160 km) has been covered, the DIST will start to function as a trip
    meter, the initial reading of which will be
    100 miles (160 km).

    If no value has been set for the DIST function, DIST will now function as a trip meter
    (indicated by an arrow on the far right of the
    display).
    Press CLR to reset the trip meter.
    Under 1000 miles the distance will be
    shown in increments of 0.1 miles,
    there-after, the reading will change in increments of 1.0 miles.
    Metric units: for just under a kilometer, the
    distance will be shown in increments of
    10 meters, there-after, the reading will
    change in increments of 100 meters.
    When DIST is functioning as a trip meter,
    the ARRIV function will display the current
    time.

    71

    To calculate the arrival time if a specified
    average speed is maintained
    1 Select DIST using the
    button.
    2 Hold the SET button for two seconds.
    3 Set the distance to be covered using
    or
    .
    4 Press SET to store settings.
    5 Press
    to select SPD Ø.
    6 Hold the SET button for two seconds.
    7 Set the average speed you intend to
    drive at using
    or
    .
    8 Press SET to display the estimated
    arrival time.
    At the beginning of a journey, the SPD Ø
    and ARRIV functions will display current
    values. If values are set during the journey,
    the new values will be displayed after a
    delay of about 10 seconds.



  • Page 72

    72

    Instruments and controls

    Calculating the requisite average speed:
    1 Press
    to select DIST.
    2 Hold the SET button for two seconds.
    3 Set the distance to be covered using
    or
    .
    4 Press SET to store settings.
    5 Press
    to select ARRIV.
    6 Hold the SET button for two seconds.
    7 Set the desired arrival time using

    or

    .
    8 Press SET to display the average speed
    you need to maintain to arrive at the
    desired time.
    At the beginning of a journey, the SPD Ø
    and ARRIV functions will display current
    values. If values are set during the journey,
    the new values will be displayed after a
    delay of about 10 seconds.

    Resetting values
    To reset the values, press CLR for at least
    four seconds.
    The following functions will be reset
    simultaneously:
    • Estimated range on remaining fuel
    (function based on a fuel consumption of
    28 mpg)
    • Average fuel consumption
    • Average speed
    • Arrival time (function based on current
    speed)
    Programmed values for DIST, ALARM and
    SPD Ø will not be reset (see the respective
    function).

    CHECK messages
    When the engine is started, CHECKING will
    appear on the display for about four seconds, while the SID checks are being performed.
    When a CHECK message is generated
    while the car is being driven, a chime will
    sound, INFO DISPL will illuminate on the
    main instrument panel, and the message
    will appear on the SID. The number of messages that can be displayed by the SID
    varies with the specification of the car.
    If more than one CHECK message has
    been generated, the + symbol will appear to
    the left of the text on the display. The messages appear in order of priority.
    If a new fault occurs while another message
    is being displayed, the message relating to
    the new one will appear for 10 seconds,
    after which the display will return to the earlier one.
    Press CLR once to acknowledge a message, whereupon it will be cleared from the
    display. It will not be displayed again before
    the ignition has been switched off and then
    on again.



  • Page 73

    Instruments and controls
    The following CHECK messages may be
    displayed:
    Display shows:
    BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE
    FRONT LIGHT FAILURE
    REAR LIGHT FAILURE
    FOG LIGHT FAILURE
    WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW
    TIGHTEN FUEL FILLER CAP
    FILL COOLANT FLUID
    KEY NOT ACCEPTED
    REPLACE KEY BATTERY
    SERVICE THEFT ALARM
    TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING
    TIME FOR SERVICE 1)

    See
    page
    202
    200
    202
    203
    199
    151
    192
    45
    45
    45
    159
    230

    1) This message will be displayed approximately
    600 miles (1,000 km) before the next scheduled service is due, or when 365 days have
    elapsed since the last service. The message
    should be cleared at the time of that service
    (see the Saab Warranties & Service Record
    Booklet).
    This message can also be deleted by first
    briefly pressing the CLR button, then depressing it a second time for at least eight seconds
    until "SERVICE" appears on the display and a
    chime sounds. The message can only be
    deleted when it is shown on the SID.

    Night panel
    To improve night-driving conditions inside
    the car, the Night Panel mode can be
    selected. In this mode, the amount of information displayed is reduced, and only the
    most important instruments and displays
    will be illuminated.
    When the Night Panel button is pressed,
    only the speedometer will be illuminated (up
    to the 87-mph or 140-km/h graduation), all
    the other instruments illumination will be
    extinguished and their needles moved to
    zero. Both the SID and the ACC displays will
    be extinguished and the backlighting for
    switches and other controls will be dimmed.
    Note: All indicator and warning lights,
    together with the display of CHECK messages, will operate as normal.

    73

    The following conditions will wake up the
    respective displays in the Night-Panel
    mode:
    • Setting of the Audio System, SID or ACC
    (display comes on for ten seconds).
    • CHECK message generated in the SID.
    • High engine revs cause the rev counter to
    be illuminated until the engine speed has
    fallen again.
    • If the quantity of fuel remaining falls below
    4 gallons (15 liters), the fuel gauge will be
    illuminated.
    • If the engine temperature rises above normal, the temperature gauge will be illuminated.
    • If the speed of the car exceeds 84 mph
    (135 km/h), the entire speedometer will
    be illuminated.
    • In cars with automatic transmission, if the
    selector lever is moved from D to position
    3, 2 or 1, the selector indication on the
    main instrument panel will be illuminated.
    To restore the displays and lighting to the
    normal mode, press the Night-Panel button.



  • Page 74

    Instruments and controls

    Units and language versions
    The SID has four sets of units:
    METRIC

    IMP. 1

    IMP. 2

    US

    km

    miles

    miles

    miles

    km/h

    mph

    mph

    mph

    litres

    gallons

    gallons

    US
    gallons

    °C

    °F

    °C

    °F

    24 hours

    12 hours 12 hours 12 hours

    CHECK messages can be displayed in six
    language options: English, Swedish,
    German, French, Italian and Spanish.

    Selecting units and language
    1 Press the CLR and SET buttons at the
    same time for 4 seconds until an audible
    signal sounds.
    2 Press
    or
    units.
    3 Touch SET.

    to select the required

    4 Press
    or
    language.
    5 Touch SET.

    to select the required
    IB1895

    74

    Clock
    Set the clock by means of the two small
    buttons under the digital clock on the left of
    the display.
    When the ignition key is in the OFF position
    or removed, the clock can be illuminated
    (approx. 10 seconds) by pressing one of
    the SID buttons (not the NIGHT PANEL
    button).
    Programming features, see page 245.



  • Page 75

    Instruments and controls

    75

    Switches
    Daytime running lights

    2

    IB1594

    1

    IB745

    The parking lights and daytime running
    lights come on automatically when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
    Note to owners in the U.S.: If you do not
    want Daytime Running Lights, this feature
    can be disconnected: switch off the engine
    and remove fuse No. 15 (see page 208).
    Note to owners in Canada: Daytime Running Lights must not be disconnected as
    they are a Canadian Federal legal requirement.

    Light switches

    1 Headlight flasher
    2 High/low beam

    High/low beam
    Parking lights
    The parking lights can be switched on
    regardless of the position of the ignition
    switch. Do not use parking lights when driving.
    Note:
    The lighting switch must be in parking or
    headlight position to operate the rear fog
    light (see page 77).

    Headlights
    The headlights come on when the ignition
    switch is in the OFF, ON or START positions. Note that they go off again when the
    ignition switch is turned to LOCK.

    To switch from high to low beam, move the
    control stalk towards the steering wheel to
    position 2. When the high beam is on, it is
    shown by an indicator light in the main
    instrument panel.

    Headlight flasher
    To flash your headlights, move the control
    stalk towards the steering wheel to
    position 1. The high beam will remain on
    until you release the switch.



  • Page 76

    76

    Instruments and controls

    Courtesy Headlamp Feature

    0
    2
    Turn signal & lane change indicators
    1 Right turn signal indicators
    2 Left turn signal indicators

    Turn signal & lane change indicators
    To switch on the indicators, move the stalk
    up or down.
    The stalk has fixed positions for indicating a
    right or left turn, and the indicators are cancelled automatically (stalk returns to off
    position) after most turns.
    The stalk also has an intermediate,
    spring-loaded position that is useful for signalling when changing lanes or passing.
    The respective indicator lights on the instrument panel flash at the same frequency as
    the indicators

    IB749

    • Switch off the ignition and remove the key
    • Open the driver’s door
    • Pull the high/low beam control stalk
    towards the steering wheel like you are
    flashing the high beam, see page 75. The
    low beam headlights will now come on
    immediately after the driver’s door has
    been closed (within 30 seconds) and will
    remain on for about 30 seconds.

    1

    IB1595

    A delay function allows the headlights to
    remain on low beam for about 30 seconds
    after the driver’s door has been closed.
    To activate this function,

    Hazard warning lights
    When this button is pressed, all the turn
    signal & lane change indicators and a
    symbol in the button flash simultaneously. If
    the ignition is on, both indicator lights on the
    instrument panel will also flash.
    If the hazard warning lights are left on for
    some time, the flasher frequency will be
    reduced to save the battery.
    Hazard warning lights should only be used
    if, because of a crash or breakdown, the car
    constitutes a hazard to other road users.



  • Page 77

    Instruments and controls

    77

    IB750

    Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
    has to be left at the roadside on account
    of a crash, engine trouble or a flat tire.
    If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
    they should be set up along side of the
    road 300 ft. (100 m) behind your vehicle.
    If the car is not clearly visible (e.g. over
    the brow of a hill or bridge), place the triangle/flare even further back.

    IB751

    WARNING

    Back-Up

    Rear fog light

    Front fog lights

    The back-up lights come on automatically
    when reverse gear is engaged or selected
    with the ignition switched on.

    Your Saab is equipped with one rear fog
    light and this is located on the driver´s side
    in the rear taillight housing.
    Press the button to switch on the rear fog
    light, which will only come on if the headlights or front fog lights are on.
    The rear fog light will go off automatically
    when the engine is switched off. When the
    fog light is next needed, it will have to be
    switched on manually again.
    Make sure you are familiar with the applicable provincial/state law regarding the
    use of rear fog light.

    Press the button to switch on the fog lights
    fitted in the front spoiler. These should be
    used in poor visibility. They will only operate
    on low beam and switch off automatically on
    high beam.
    Make sure you are familiar with the applicable provincial/state law regarding the
    use of fog lights.

    WARNING
    In poor visibility, avoid following the tail
    lights of the vehicle in front. If the vehicle
    stops suddenly, you may be unable to
    avoid a crash and therefore risk injury to
    yourself and others.



  • Page 78

    78

    Instruments and controls

    Wipers and washers
    Windshield wipers
    The delay of the intermittent operation can
    be adjusted to between 2 and 15 seconds.
    Moving the control stalk to the
    spring-loaded position between 0 and 2 will
    produce a single sweep of the wipers.

    Instrument lighting
    The brightness of the instrument lighting
    can be varied by means of the dimmer
    switch adjacent to the headlight switch, the
    ignition switch shall be in position ON. (See
    also Night panel on page 73).
    In daylight or other equally bright light, the
    instrument and switch illumination is automatically extinguished.

    When the washers are operated the wipers
    will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps depending on
    how long the washers were in action. If the
    speed of the car is less than 12 mph
    (20 km/h) the wipers will make an additional
    sweep after about 9 seconds.
    The headlights are washed and wiped automatically whenever you use the windshield
    washers. They cannot be operated independently of the windshield washers.

    IB753

    IB752

    Washers

    0 OFF
    1 Windshield wipers: intermittent operation.
    The delay can be adjusted to between 2 and
    15 seconds
    2 Windshield wipers: low speed
    3 Windshield wipers: high speed
    4 Washing the windshield and cleaning the
    headlights



  • Page 79

    Instruments and controls

    79

    Rear-window wiper

    Control for setting wiper delay
    1 Long delay
    2 Short delay

    The
    position gives washing and wiping.
    After a few sweeps the wiper stops, or
    reverts to intermittent wiping if this has been
    selected. When washing/wiping of the rear
    window ends, the wiper makes a single
    sweep after about 15 seconds to wipe away
    any remaining washer fluid.
    Moving the control stalk to the
    spring-loaded position between OFF and
    ON will produce a single sweep of the wipers.
    Intermittent wiping of the rear window is
    done when reverse gear is selected, if the
    wipers are in position 1, 2 or 3, see page 78.

    IB754

    IB935

    Rear-window washing and wiping are carried out using the same stalk switch as for
    washing and wiping the windshield and
    headlights.
    This stalk has two additional switches,
    ON/OFF and
    .
    The ON position gives intermittent wiping.

    Rear-window wiper
    1 Intermittent wiping
    2 Washing



  • Page 80

    80

    Instruments and controls

    Manual climate-control
    system

    IB755

    IB032

    The air is drawn in through an intake at the
    bottom edge of the windshield. It passes
    through an efficient filter before being
    routed through the climate-control system
    and into the cabin. The cabin discharge vent
    is located on the right behind the rear
    bumper. The air discharge vents should be
    kept free of snow and ice in the winter.

    Fan
    The rate of air flow inside the car is controlled by means of the fan switch.

    Temperature control
    The temperature of the incoming air can
    be steplessly varied using the temperature
    control.

    Control panel: manual system

    Dash vent

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1 Adjusting the direction of the air flow.
    2 Adjusting the air flow

    Temperature
    Fan speed
    Air distribution
    Air conditioning (A/C)
    Rear-window heating
    Recirculation

    Air distribution
    The air distribution control is used to direct
    the flow of air to the defroster, dash and floor
    vents.
    The control permits settings intermediately
    between the three main settings so that the
    available air can be apportioned between
    the floor and the windshield (defroster) or
    between the floor and the panel.
    To counter cold drafts from the front side
    windows when the control has been set to
    defroster or floor, a small flow of air issues
    from the dash vents.

    The dash vents swivel universally, so that
    the air can be directed as desired.
    The flow of air through the dash vents can
    be adjusted for each vent by means of the
    adjacent control.
    Air to the rear side windows is supplied by
    the floor ducts. To demist these windows
    you should therefore select a defroster/floor
    combination.
    If the windows are thoroughly cleaned it is
    much easier to keep them free of mist.



  • Page 81

    Instruments and controls

    81

    IB762

    Settings for
    various weather
    conditions

    Winter - defroster

    IB983

    Defroster

    Winter - comfort
    incl. rear side windows

    IB984

    Floor

    Summer - cloudy

    Panel

    incl. rear center vent
    IB985

    As the winter comfort setting we recommend that the distribution
    knob be turned two steps to the left from the Defroster position.

    Summer - sunny



  • Page 82

    82

    Instruments and controls
    Air conditioning (A/C)

    IB794

    The air conditioning is combined with the
    conventional climate-control system and is

    Air vent at rear side window

    switched on by pressing the
    button,
    provided that the fan control is in
    position 1-4.
    The incoming air is treated in three stages:
    first it passes through a filter; it is then dehumidified and cooled and, finally, if required,
    heated.
    The air conditioning can be used at outdoor
    temperatures down to 32°F (0°C).

    Condensation water
    When the A/C compressor is on, the incoming air is dehumidified. The resulting condensation water is drained away through an
    outlet under the car.
    It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
    be seen dripping from this outlet when the
    car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
    and the higher the humidity, the more condensation will form.

    Recirculation
    When the
    button is depressed the
    regular air intake will be closed. In this position, the air inside the cabin is recirculated.
    Use recirculation when you want rapid cooling, at extremely high air temperatures.
    Switch the air conditioning (A/C) on first.
    Recirculation can be useful to activate manually to prevent unpleasant smells being
    drawn into the car from outside.
    Note that recirculation should not be
    used when the outside temperature is
    lower than 50°F (+10°C) except briefly,
    e.g. to avoid unpleasant air from entering the car. Prolonged use of recirculation could cause the windows to mist or
    ice up.



  • Page 83

    Instruments and controls
    Electrically heated rear
    window/external mirrors
    The button is located on the climate-control
    panel. An LED in the button is lit as long as
    heating is on.
    Switch off the heating as soon as the rear
    window is clear. It will go off automatically
    after about 10 minutes.
    If the battery voltage is lower than 12 V the
    heating will be switched off earlier so that
    the battery can get the benefit of the alternator charge.
    Avoid placing sharp objects on the rear
    parcel shelf; the heater elements may suffer
    damage if such objects touch the rear window. Do not switch the heating on until you
    have started the engine.

    Recommended settings in
    severe cold
    On starting with a cold engine, set the fan
    switch to position 2 and select defrost to
    heat the cabin and defrost the windshield as
    quickly as possible.
    When the engine is warm enough for the
    reading of the temperature gauge to start
    rising, fan setting 3 may be chosen. Once
    the windshield is clear, the air-distribution
    control should be shifted two steps to the
    left.
    The warm-up time of the engine depends on
    the kind of driving. Town driving in high gear
    with a low RPM requires a longer warm-up
    time than highway driving with a higher
    RPM.
    Do not use position 4 on the fan switch, as
    this is mainly intended to provide rapid cooling in hot weather.

    83

    Fault diagnosis and care of A/C system, see page 226.



  • Page 84

    84

    Instruments and controls

    IB794

    The air is drawn in through an intake at the
    bottom edge of the windshield. It passes
    through an efficient filter before being
    routed through the climate-control system
    and into the cabin. The cabin discharge vent
    is located on the right behind the rear
    bumper. The air discharge vents should be
    kept free of snow and ice in the winter.
    ACC (Automatic Climate Control) automatically maintains the desired cabin temperature, regardless of the weather outside.
    The system will achieve the desired temperature in the quickest possible way.
    Note that heating or cooling is not
    speeded up by setting the temperature
    higher or lower than you really want.
    For the ACC system to be most effective, all
    windows, and the sunroof if there is one,
    must be closed, and the panel vents must
    be open.
    The incoming air is treated in three stages:
    first it passes through a filter; it is then dehumidified and cooled and, finally, if required,
    heated.

    IB032

    Automatic climate
    control (ACC)

    Air vent at rear side window

    Dash vent
    1 Adjusting the direction of the air flow.
    2 Adjusting the air flow

    The temperature interval within which you
    can make adjustments is 58-82°F
    (15-27°C). Outside it, there is the HI position
    (max. heat and high fan speed) and the LO
    position (max. cooling and max. fan speed).
    The displayed temperature is not the actual
    temperature but corresponds to the comfort
    level normally experienced at that temperature after allowance has been made for the
    air flow, relative humidity, solar radiation,
    etc., currently prevailing inside the car.
    • The most usual temperature setting is
    66-74°F (19-23°C), depending on personal preference and what clothing is
    worn.

    • It is recommended that changes in the
    temperature setting be made in steps of
    2°F (1°C).
    • Conversion between °C and °F is done in
    the SID unit; see ”Units and language versions”, page 74.
    • During the cooling phase in warm
    weather the panel vents must be open.
    • Do not manually select recirculation in
    cold/wintery weather. The reduced air
    flow can cause misting and ice on the
    inside of the windows.



  • Page 85

    Instruments and controls
    The system uses five sensors:

    Condensation water






    When the A/C compressor is on, the incoming air is dehumidified. The resulting condensation water is drained away through an
    outlet under the car.
    It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
    be seen dripping from this outlet when the
    car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
    and the higher the humidity, the more condensation will form.

    IB763

    Outside-air temperature.
    Cabin-air temperature.
    Sun sensor.
    Blended-air temperature (located in the
    heater unit).
    • Coolant temperature.
    The sun sensor is centrally located on the
    dashboard panel between the defroster
    nozzles. Note that if anything is placed over
    the sun sensor the ACC system will not
    function properly.

    1 Sun sensor
    2 Interior-temperature sensor

    85



  • Page 86

    86

    Instruments and controls

    IB764

    Button

    Functions
    The function you have manually selected will be locked in, while
    other functions remain automatic.
    Temperature maintenance, except in positions HI and LO, is, therefore always automatic. The active function is shown in the display.
    A manual selection is cancelled by pressing AUTO or by repeated
    pressing of the button used to make the manual choice. For further
    functions, see ”Programming II”, page 91.
    Button

    Display
    When the system is set to AUTO, the
    temperature, air distribution, fan
    speed and recirculation will be controlled automatically.
    The air conditioning is activated automatically if the outside temperature is
    above 32°F (0°C). When AUTO is
    depressed again, all automatically
    selected settings are shown on the
    display.

    Display
    Setting the cabin temperature
    1 Switch on the ignition.
    2 Set the desired cabin temperature using the two buttons.
    3 The temperature you have now
    chosen will be stored, remaining
    in the memory even when the
    ignition is switched off, unless
    ACC has been programmed with
    a different "ON" setting. See programming, page 90.



  • Page 87

    Instruments and controls
    Button

    Display

    Button
    One touch:
    When Defroster is manually selected
    you will get demisting of all windows
    (the air flow to the rear side windows
    will be shut off) by high fan speed. Air
    will be routed to the defroster nozzles. Normal temperature control,
    recirculation and ECON will be
    switched off but the electric heating
    of the rear window and outside mirrors will be switched on. Current settings will be shown on the display and
    AUTO will go out.
    The demister function remains operative until another selection is made,
    but the heating of the rear window
    and the outside mirrors will be
    switched off after a certain time,
    depending on the outside temperature.
    Two touches:
    Two touches on the defroster button
    routes the air to the windshield without any increase in fan speed and
    without switching on the rear-window
    heating.
    To revert to the previous setting,
    press the AUTO button.

    87

    Display

    Panel (and center rear vent)

    Floor, front and rear (and rear side
    windows)
    Press
    simultaneously

    Defroster - floor (front and rear)



  • Page 88

    88
    Button
    Press
    simultaneously

    Instruments and controls
    Display

    Button

    Display
    Recirculation is controlled automatically, but there is also manual
    ON/OFF control.

    Panel - floor (front and rear) and
    center rear vent
    Electrically heated rear window/electrically heated door mirrors are controlled automatically, though they
    can also be programmed for manual
    control; see
    ”Programming II”, page 91.
    The temperature, air distribution and
    fan speed will still be controlled automatically.
    Press
    or
    to
    increase/decrease the fan speed
    (the fan setting is shown on the display).
    To revert to automatic fan control,
    press AUTO. Other manual selections will revert to automatic control
    at the same time.

    When this function is activated the
    A/C compressor will be shut off.
    Reconnection can be made with one
    press on AUTO or pressing ECON.
    The function can be programmed for
    automatic A/C disconnection when
    the outside temperature falls below
    57°F (+14°C), see "Programming II",
    page 91.
    The temperature, air distribution and
    fan speed will still be controlled automatically.
    After you have depressed OFF there
    will be no control.
    You can re-activate by pressing
    AUTO or by again pressing OFF,
    which gives the latest setting.



  • Page 89

    Instruments and controls

    Starting in hot weather: The automatic climate control system selects air to the panel
    vents and high fan speed. Recirculation is
    switched on about 30 seconds after starting
    if the selected cabin temperature is markedly lower than the actual temperature.
    Unless the ECON button has been
    depressed, the A/C compressor is always
    switched on at outside temperatures above
    32°F (0°C) in order to cool and dehumidify
    the incoming air, unless the ECON button
    has been depressed.
    As the temperature inside the car nears the
    selected value, the fan speed will be
    decreased to a value determined by the
    system.

    Action to be taken in special types of
    weather
    Normally, misting and icing problems on the
    windows do not occur other than in extreme
    situations, e.g. when you are driving in
    heavy rain or severe cold in combination
    with high air humidity or when those travelling in the car are sweaty and wet. If you
    have trouble with misting or icing in such
    cases we suggest the following countermeasures:
    1 Select
    (21°C).

    and temperature 70°F

    2 Select
    . If this is not enough ...
    3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not
    enough ...
    4 Select a higher temperature.
    Air to the rear side windows is supplied by
    the floor ducts. To demist these windows
    you should therefore select a defroster/floor
    combination by pressing both buttons at the
    same time.

    IB793

    Starting in cold weather: The automatic
    climate control system selects the defroster
    position, max. heating and low fan speed to
    begin with.
    As the engine temperature rises, the fan
    speed is increased and air is routed towards
    the floor.
    As the temperature inside the car nears the
    selected value, both the fan speed and the
    heat will be decreased to a level determined
    by the system.

    89



  • Page 90

    90

    Instruments and controls

    Calibration

    Programming I

    If the battery has been disconnected or has run flat, the system will
    recalibrate automatically.
    Manual calibration:
    1 Start the engine.

    The manual selections you have made can be saved so that the
    ACC system always starts up on these selections every time the
    ignition is switched on. But notice that the ignition must have been
    off for at least 10 minutes before you try out the saved setting.

    2 Press
    +
    at the same time. The ACC display flashes
    once to indicate that calibration and self-testing have started.
    During calibration the display indicates the figure 0 or the fault codes
    (01-23) that have been found.
    Calibration and self-testing takes about 30 seconds.

    2 Press
    +
    at the same time.
    (The ACC background lighting flashes to confirm that the information has been stored.)

    1 Select the desired settings.

    Example:
    If you want the ACC system to distribute the air to the dash vents
    from the start, proceed as follows:
    1 Start the engine.
    2 Press the button

    .

    3 Press
    and
    at the same time.
    4 Shut off the key.
    5 The system will memorize this new program 10 minutes after the
    key is shut off.

    Cancelling program I
    A saved setting is deleted only by pressing
    +
    at the
    same time.
    (The ACC display flashes to confirm that deletion has been
    effected.)



  • Page 91

    Instruments and controls
    Programming II
    It is also possible to customize the ACC system to adapt to driving
    and weather conditions.
    Function

    Operation in AUTO mode Standard operation in
    after Programming II
    AUTO mode
    The A/C compressor is not
    switched on until the outside temperature goes
    above +55°F (+13°C).
    – This function can be used
    to save fuel, since the A/C
    compressor will not be in
    action for so long a time.
    In wet weather, however,
    the A/C compressor should
    be on at below 57°F (14°C)
    as well, since this reduces
    the risk of misting on the
    windows.

    A/C compressor cuts in
    when outside temperature is above 32°F
    (0°C).

    Rear-window heating can The heating will come on
    only be switched on manu- about five seconds after
    ally.
    the engine has started if
    the outside temperature
    is below +41°F (+5°C).
    –The activation time
    depends on the outside
    temperature.

    91

    Programming and cancellation of programming is carried out by
    holding the appropriate button down until the corresponding symbol
    has flashed 4 times, an audible signal has sounded and the following text for the desired function has appeared in the SID.
    Make sure the ignition is ON.
    Function

    Text displayed on SID
    during programming

    Text displayed on SID
    when cancelling
    program

    ACC: LO TEMP
    A/C CTRL

    ACC: NORMAL
    A/C CTRL

    ACC: MANUAL
    RDEFR CTRL

    ACC: AUTO
    RDEFR CTRL

    Example:
    If you want to control the switching on and off of the heating for the
    rear window and the door mirrors manually, hold the
    button
    depressed until the symbol has flashed 4 times, an audible signal
    has sounded and the following text has appeared in the SID.
    SID shows:
    ACC: MANUAL
    RDEFR CTRL
    Once a function has been recorded under ”Programming II”, it will
    remain in the system until you cancel the program.
    AUTO will still show on the display after a function has been saved
    in ”Programming II”.
    Additional programming features, see page 245.



  • Page 92

    Instruments and controls

    Useful tips:

    ACC - 9-3 Convertible

    If the ACC system is not functioning
    satisfactorily the following should be tried
    before you take the car to an authorized
    Saab dealer.

    When the soft top is folded down the ACC
    system goes over to manual temperature
    setting.
    Between HI and LO there are eleven (0-10)
    fixed temperature steps.
    The system adjusts itself as follows:

    • If the indication AUTO does not light up
    after starting (the ignition must have been
    switched off for at least 10 minutes): See
    “Cancelling program I”, page 90.
    • If you think that the ACC system is not
    functioning satisfactorily you should:
    1 Check that the cigarette lighter plug is in
    its socket (since if the socket is empty
    heated air can flow out and affect the
    cabin sensor).
    2 Recalibrate: See the section headed
    Calibration, page 90.
    • If the battery has been disconnected or
    has died, the ACC system should be recalibrated: See Calibration, pag 90.
    Programmed settings are not deleted if the
    battery has been disconnected.

    Extinguishing the lighting in ACC
    See section Night panel, page 73.

    • AUTO is turned off.
    • Heating, air distribution and fan speed are
    not affected.
    • Recirculation and electric rear window
    are turned off.
    • A/C assumes the same setting (ON/OFF)
    as it had when the soft top was last folded
    down.
    All manual selections are possible with the
    exception of electric rear window.
    Saab recommends leaving the ACC setting
    on ECON when the soft top is folded down
    to improve fuel economy and unnecessary
    running of the A/C compressor.
    When the soft top is raised the system
    reverts to the AUTO mode and the previous
    set temperature.

    IB795

    92

    ACC display with soft top folded down

    Fault diagnosis and care of A/C system, see page 226.



  • Page 93

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    93

    Saab 9-3 Audio
    System

    IB1934

    Quick guide to the Saab
    9-3 Audio System ...........
    Sound controls.................
    Radio .................................
    CD player ..........................
    CD changer.......................
    General functions ............
    Steering-wheel controls ..
    Security lock.....................
    Technical data ..................
    Fault codes .......................

    95
    97
    98
    100
    102
    105
    106
    106
    107
    109



  • Page 94

    94

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    Saab 9-3 Audio System
    The Saab 9-3 Audio System comes in two
    levels, Premium and Prestige. They are
    specially adapted to the cabin space in the
    Saab 9-3.
    The Saab 9-3 Audio System consists of a
    main unit with a radio and an in-dash CD
    player. There is a also a CD player and a CD
    changer for 6 CD discs available as an
    accessory.
    The Premium Audio System has two loudspeakers at the front and two at the rear.
    Output is 4x20 watts.
    The Prestige Audio System 3 has two additional loudspeakers. They are mounted in
    the front doors and reproduce bass tones
    below 200 Hz. These subwoofers have their
    own amplifier of 2x40 watts.

    The Audio Systems are interconnected with
    SID (Saab Information Display) which is
    located above the radio in the instrument
    panel. The Audio Systems uses the display
    of the SID instrument to show text/characters and indications.

    Indicator
    AS

    Radio is in Autostore mode

    RDM

    Random playback of CD
    tracks when CD player
    selected



  • Page 95

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    Quick guide to the Saab 9-3
    Audio System

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6

    95

    Preset station buttons
    Press once: play the preset station.
    Press and hold briefly: store a new station.

    Radio, see page 98
    PUSH

    ON

    BAS

    VOL

    TRE

    PULL

    BAL

    FAD

    On
    To switch the system ON, press the volume button. The last settings used will be activated.
    If the Audio System is switched on when the ignition key is not in the switch, the system will automatically be switched off after one hour has
    elapsed since a control button on the radio was
    last pressed.
    Off
    To switch the system OFF, press the volume
    button or remove the ignition key.
    VOL
    To adjust the volume, rotate the VOL control.
    BAL
    To adjust the balance between the left and right
    channels, pull out and turn the VOL control.
    BAS
    Press to release the button, and adjust the bass
    level. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
    TRE
    Press to release the button, and adjust the treble. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
    FAD
    Press to release the button, and adjust the balance between the front and rear sets of speakers. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.

    SEEK

    AS

    SEARCH

    Auto tuning
    Touch: SEEK.
    Press and hold briefly (a chime will sound):
    manual tuning.
    Press SEEK once: frequency display
    Touch: AS (AutoStore) ON/OFF.
    Press and hold briefly: automatic tuning and
    storing of the 6 strongest stations in the area in
    which you are currently driving.
    Touch: change to radio when CD active.

    Press once: Mute ON/OFF.

    Press once: change waveband.



  • Page 96

    96

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    CD player. See page 100
    CD

    RDM

    SEEK

    CD changer (option). See page 102

    Touch: change to CD playback when other
    sound source is active.
    Press and hold briefly (a chime will sound):
    random playback.

    Touch: change to CD changer when CD player
    is active.
    Two touches: change to CD changer when
    radio is active.
    Press and hold briefly (a chime will sound):
    random playback of entire magazine.

    CD

    RDM

    Touch: SEEK at either end to change track.
    Press and hold briefly: fast playback or fast
    track changes.
    Touch center on SEEK (a chime will sound):
    change between functions fast playback
    (PLAY) and fast track changes (TRACK).

    Touch: SEEK at either end to change track.
    Touch and hold briefly: fast playback.
    Press SEEK (center) once: Switch between
    Rapid play (PLAY) and Fast track search
    (TRACK).

    SEEK

    Remove CD.
    Selects disc in magazine.
    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6



  • Page 97

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    97

    Sound controls
    ON/OFF
    The Audio System will come on:

    • When the volume control is pressed.
    • When the ignition key is removed.
    • One hour after the ignition was switched
    OFF, if the ignition key has not been
    removed.
    • When one hour has elapsed since a control button was pressed if the Audio
    system was switched on when the
    ignition key was not in the switch.

    VOL - Volume
    BAL - Balance
    Pull out and rotate the VOL control to adjust
    the balance between the left and right
    speakers. When the control is released, it
    reverts to the volume function.

    IB1834

    • When the volume control is pressed.
    • When the ignition is switched ON, if the
    Audio System was on when the ignition
    key was last removed.
    The Audio System will be switched off:

    BAS - Bass
    TRE - Treble
    Rotate clockwise to increase the level and
    counter-clockwise to reduce it.
    The Bass and Treble controls must be
    pressed first to release them.

    FAD - Fader
    The fader control adjusts the balance
    between the front and rear sets of speakers.
    The Fader control must be pressed first to
    release it.



  • Page 98

    98

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    Radio
    Press the RADIO button to switch to the
    radio when another source is active.

    Preset station buttons (1)

    The small figure on the far right of the display is the number of the preset button
    selected.
    Presetting a station
    Press the desired button and hold it down
    for more than a second to store the currently
    tuned station. During this time, the radio will
    be mute. The sound will return as soon as
    the station has been stored.

    IB1836

    Press once (release within a second) to
    select a preset station, e.g.

    Seeking (2)

    AS, Autostore (4)

    Automatic seek tuning:
    Press
    briefly to search for higher frequencies or
    for lower frequencies.
    Manual tuning:
    To switch to the manual-tuning function,
    press
    or
    and hold until a
    chime sounds and the M indicator appears
    on the display.
    The function will revert to automatic seek
    tuning two seconds after the last manual
    frequency change has been made.

    The autostore mode provides an additional
    preset function that can be used to search
    for and to store stations when you are in an
    area where you are unfamiliar with the stations and their frequencies. This can be
    done without changing your normal presets.
    Touch the AS button to switch the Autostore
    mode ON/OFF. When the Autostore mode
    is ON, the AS indicator will show at the
    bottom of the display.
    Press and hold the AS button for more than
    a second to initiate an automatic search for
    the six strongest stations.
    Each time the system finds and stores a station, the number on the far right of the SID
    display will change. If the system cannot

    Band selector (3)
    Touch the BAND button repeatedly to move
    through the waveband selections: FM1,
    FM2 and AM.



  • Page 99

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    99

    IB1836

    find six stations with good reception, the
    remaining preset buttons will be empty. If
    one of these empty buttons is pressed, FM
    or AM**** will appear on the display.
    When the system leaves the AS mode, it
    returns to the station that was selected
    before the AS mode was activated.
    The AS mode can also be used in the AM
    band.



  • Page 100

    100

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    CD player
    NOTE

    To select the CD mode, load a CD into the
    deck or, if one is already loaded, press the
    CD/RDM button.
    Insert the CD, label-side up, and allow the
    mechanism to load it automatically. Playback of the first track will start and the following message will appear on the display:

    A tiny, amber-colored LED indicator to the
    left of the disc tray is illuminated when a disc
    is loaded.
    When all the tracks have been played, the
    CD player will restart playback from track 1.
    To cancel playback, press the eject or
    RADIO button.

    IB1837

    Do not use writable CDs in your audio
    system, as in certain cases these types of
    CD are only suitable for home use and
    can therefore cause operational problems (overheating).

    Track search (1)

    Rapid play (passage search)

    Touch
    or
    repeatedly to move
    to preceding or following tracks. Touching
    once will restart playback from the
    beginning of the current track. To change to
    the preceding track, touch
    twice.

    When
    or
    is pressed and
    held, rapid play will be initiated, with the time
    and track showing on the display, e.g.:

    If the button is depressed for more than
    5 seconds, the rapid play will be even faster.
    Rapid play stops when the button is
    released.



  • Page 101

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    101

    Fast track changes
    Touch SEEK (mid-segment) to switch
    between the CD PLAY and CD TRACK
    modes.

    CD PLAY

    Pressing and holding
    or
    starts
    Rapid play.

    CD TRACK

    Pressing and holding
    or
    activates
    track changes.

    IB1837

    The CD PLAY and CD TRACK modes
    change the function of
    and
    .
    The selected mode will also be active the
    next time the system is switched on.
    Choose the mode that you find most convenient:

    Random playback (RDM) (2)
    Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
    select/deselect random playback of the current disc. When this function is selected,
    RDM will appear at the bottom of the display.
    Touch
    to move from the current
    track to the next during random playback.
    Touch
    to repeat the current track
    during random playback.
    Pressing and holding
    or
    will
    start Rapid play.

    Eject (3)
    Touch
    to remove the disc.
    If you press the eject button to open the tray
    but fail to remove the disc, the CD player will
    automatically close the tray again after
    10 seconds to protect the disc, without
    restarting playback.



  • Page 102

    102

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    CD changer

    3

    (accessory)

    Important! Always keep the sliding cover
    closed to keep dust out of the CD changer,
    so that it will continue to provide satisfactory
    service for a long time.
    To load the CD changer, which is installed
    in the trunk and can accommodate six CDs,
    proceed as follows:
    1 Slide the cover back.
    2 The CD magazine will automatically
    eject after it has retrieved all discs.
    3 Press the catch on the magazine to one
    side.
    4 Withdraw one CD tray at a time and
    swap or load the CD (label side up).
    Slide the tray back into the magazine.
    Note the position of the magazine for loading (see picture).
    Insert the entire magazine carefully inside
    the CD changer and slide the cover closed
    again.

    IB799

    Do not use writable CDs in your audio
    system, as in certain cases these types of
    CD are only suitable for home use and
    can therefore cause operational problems (overheating).

    4

    IB383

    NOTE

    CD changer in trunk

    To select the CD changer
    • If the Audio System is in the RADIO
    mode, touch the CD/RDM button twice.
    • If the CD player is active, touch the
    CD/RDM button once.
    If the CDs in the magazine have not been
    changed, the system will restart playback
    from where it left off.
    If there is no magazine in the CD changer,
    the following will appear on the display:

    If the magazine in the CD changer is empty,
    the following will appear on the display:



  • Page 103

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    103

    If the CD changer is activated immediately
    after a magazine has been loaded, the following will appear on the display:

    IB1930

    The CD number will change as each CD is
    played.
    After a magazine has been loaded, playback will start with the first track on the first
    CD when the CD changer is selected, and
    the following will appear on the display:

    Selecting CDs (1)
    When the CD changer is operating, the
    radio preset buttons work for the six CDs in
    the magazine. Press the button for the corresponding CD.
    If the selected CD is already being played,
    playback will restart from the first track.

    If the selected CD-tray, e.g. 3, is empty, the
    following will appear on the display:



  • Page 104

    104

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    After two seconds, the status of the trays in
    the magazine (i.e. loaded or empty) will be
    shown on the display, e.g.:

    If for some reason the CD selected by the
    preset button cannot be played, playback of
    the current CD will continue.

    Track change (2)
    Touch
    or
    repeatedly to move
    to preceding or following tracks. Pressing
    once will restart playback from the
    beginning of the current track. Thus, to play
    the preceding track, touch
    twice.

    Fast track changes

    Random playback (RDM) (3)

    Touch SEEK (mid-segment) to switch
    between the CD PLAY and CD TRACK
    modes.

    Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
    select/deselect random playback of the
    CDs in the magazine. When this function is
    selected, RDM will appear at the bottom of
    the display.
    Touch
    to move from the current
    track to the next during random playback.
    Touch
    to repeat the current track
    during random playback.
    Pressing and holding
    or
    will
    start Rapid play.
    To stop playback from the CD changer,
    simply select another source (RADIO/CD).
    The CD changer will now enter stand-by
    mode.

    The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes
    change the function of
    and
    .
    The selected mode will also be active the
    next time the system is switched on.
    Choose the mode that you find most convenient.
    CD PLAY

    Pressing and holding
    or
    starts
    Rapid play.

    CD TRACK

    Pressing and holding
    or
    activates
    track changes.

    Rapid play
    When
    or
    is pressed and
    held, rapid play will be initiated, with the time
    and track showing on the display, e.g.:

    If the button is depressed for more than
    5 seconds, the rapid play will be even faster.
    Rapid play stops when the button is
    released.



  • Page 105

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    General functions

    • Maximum START VOL

    WARNING
    These functions should only be carried
    out when the car is stationary.

    Volume-preset mode
    To select the volume-preset mode, press
    and hold the BAND button at the same time
    as you switch the Audio System on.
    Use the
    button to select the
    required function.
    The following volume settings can be preselected:
    • START VOL - maximum volume level
    when the Audio System is switched on.
    • TEL VOL - preset volume level when an
    in-car phone is activated.
    • SP D VOL - speed-dependent volume.
    The Audio System will automatically
    adjust the volume level to suit the background noise, such as road noise, occurring while the car is in motion.
    • LOUDNESS ON/OFF - boosting of the
    highest and lowest frequency ranges to
    enhance the sound image when the
    volume is set to a low level.

    • TEL VOL

    same time as you switch on the Audio
    System.
    – Select SP D VOL using
    .
    – Select ON/OFF by turning the VOL
    control.
    – Wait 10 seconds or touch one of the buttons on the bottom row of the Audio System, e.g. RADIO, to save the new volume
    setting.

    Loudness ON/OFF

    To change the volume setting:
    – Press and hold the BAND button at the
    same time as you switch on the Audio
    System.
    – Adjust the volume.
    – Wait 10 seconds or touch one of the
    buttons on the bottom row of the Audio
    System, e.g. RADIO, to save the new volume setting.

    Speed-dependent volume
    (SP D VOL) ON/OFF

    Adjusting the volume
    The default setting for START VOL is
    volume setting 9, and that for TEL VOL is
    volume setting 14 (the highest volume setting is 30).

    105

    To change the volume setting:
    The default setting for this function is ON.
    – Press and hold the BAND button at the

    To change the loudness setting:
    The default setting for this function is ON.
    – Press and hold the BAND button at the
    same time as you switch on the Audio
    System.
    – Select LOUDNESS using
    .
    – Select ON/OFF by turning the VOL
    control.
    – Wait 10 seconds or touch one of the buttons on the bottom row of the Audio System, e.g. RADIO, to save the new volume
    setting.



  • Page 106

    106

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    Steering-wheel
    controls

    Security lock
    The Audio System is equipped with an electronic security lock. The special code is
    unique to the car in which the Audio System
    is fitted.
    Each time the Audio System is switched on,
    a check is made to ensure that the codes
    match.
    If not, the following will appear on the
    display:

    To facilitate use of the Audio System and to
    promote safer driving, most of the functions
    can be operated using the integral remote
    controls on the steering wheel.
    NEXT:
    RADIO mode: preselect buttons
    1⇒2⇒ ... ⇒6⇒1⇒ ...
    CD mode: Inoperative.
    CD-changer mode: Change CD in the
    magazine 1⇒2⇒ ... ⇒6⇒1⇒ ...
    << SEEK >>:
    RADIO mode: Auto/manual seeking.
    CD/CD-changer mode: Track
    change/Rapid play.

    IB945

    Control functions:

    Audio System controls on steering wheel
    SRC (SOURCE)
    Press repeatedly to switch between
    RADIO ⇒(CD changer) ⇒ RADIO ⇒ ...

    If a CD changer has been installed, it will
    also have been security coded.
    If the security code for the CD changer does
    not match when the changer is selected, the
    following will appear on the display:

    VOL +/–:
    Volume adjust.

    If a CD changer is to be installed or if you
    wish to move the main audio-system
    module and/or CD changer to another car
    (Saab 9-3), you must consult an authorized
    Saab dealer so that the modules can be
    given the correct security codes.



  • Page 107

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    Technical data
    Tone controls
    Bass _________________________
    Treble ________________________
    Power output __________________

    Radio module
    Radio system __________________
    Number of presets
    FM __________________________
    AM __________________________
    Frequency range
    FM __________________________
    AM __________________________
    Scanning steps
    Automatic seek tuning: ___________

    ±12 dB at 40 Hz
    ±10 dB at 15,000 Hz
    4 x 20 W (4 x 12 W at 1%
    THD (total harmonic distortion) and 13.5 V)

    PLL dual-synthesizer
    tuner
    3x6
    2x6
    87.9 MHz – 107.9 MHz
    530 kHz – 1710 kHz

    VHF (FM) 200 kHz
    AM 10 kHz
    Manual seek tuning: _____________ VHF (FM) 200 kHz
    AM 10 kHz

    CD player and CD changer
    1-bit system and 8 x oversampling
    Frequency range ________________
    Stereo separation _______________
    Distortion _____________________
    Dynamics _____________________
    CD-changer capacity: 6 discs

    107

    5-20000 Hz
    ±0.5 dB
    45 dB
    < 0.008%
    > 95 dB (1 kHz)

    Amplifier (cars with extra speakers in
    front doors)
    Power output ___________________ 2 x 40 W (2 x 30 W at 1%
    THD 50 Hz)
    Crossover frequency _____________ 110 Hz (-3 dB)
    • These specifications comply with the new IHF Standard
    • Since the policy at Saab is one of continual improvement, we retain the right to alter
    specifications and design without prior notice.
    Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance
    could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.



  • Page 108

    108

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    Antenna
    The antenna of the Audio System is motorized.
    Saab 9-3 Viggen Coupé and 5-door: The
    antenna is located on the roof.

    NOTE

    IB977

    For the cleaning of the motorized antenna,
    see the section headed "Washing", page
    220.
    The car has a factory-fitted roof antenna for
    a car phone. Roof loads may negatively
    affect telecommunication.

    IB1892

    Remove the antenna if you wash the car
    in a car wash, to avoid it being damaged.

    Multipath interference
    When the radio waves from an FM transmitter collide with a large building, for example,
    they will be reflected so that they reach the
    car antenna slightly later than the direct
    waves. This is referred to as multipath distortion. The effect is liable to be blamed
    upon malfunctions in the radio.

    Accessories and other equipment must
    not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
    these are where the airbags may inflate in
    the event of a crash.

    WARNING
    To reduce the risk of head injuries in the
    event of a crash, the headliner and pillar
    trims incorporate energy absorbing material (Convertible: pillar trims and header
    trims). These areas must not be modified
    in any way. Work on these areas must
    only be carried out at an authorized Saab
    dealer.



  • Page 109

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    Fault codes
    WARNING
    NOTE
    Great care should be exercised in trying
    to rectify a fault. If you are at all unsure,
    contact an authorized Saab dealer.
    The Audio System has a built-in diagnostics
    function. If a fault is detected, a fault code is
    generated to help dealer technicians to
    diagnose the fault. Below is an example of
    a fault code that you might be able to rectify
    yourself.
    Fault code

    Possible cause

    CD/CDC
    ERROR
    12/17/19

    CD is dirty, loaded the
    wrong side up or defective.

    The CD player/CD changer is classified
    as Class 1 laser equipment.
    • Service and repair work must only be
    carried out by authorized technicians.
    • If the casing is damaged, hazardous
    laser radiation can occur.

    109

    Adjusting the frequency steps
    North America/Europe
    If the car is taken from Europe to North
    America, the radio’s frequency steps will
    need to be adjusted.
    • With the radio off, press and hold
    (mid-segment) and switch the
    radio on at the same time.
    The station presets will be cancelled and
    replaced by preset frequencies.



  • Page 110

    110

    Saab 9-3 Audio System

    (This page has been left blank)



  • Page 111

    OnStar - Telematics

    111

    OnStar - Telematics

    Using OnStar...................

    112

    OnStar is Easy............................
    OnStar Services Button..............
    Emergency button ......................
    White dot button .........................
    System status light .....................

    112
    112
    113
    113
    113

    The OnStar Center..........

    114

    Connecting to the OnStar center
    Your personal identification number
    (PIN) ...........................................

    114

    The OnStar Safety and
    Security Plan.................
    Automatic notification of air bag
    deployment .................................
    Emergency services ...................
    Roadside assistance...................
    Stolen vehicle tracking ................
    Accident Assist™........................
    OnStar Med-Net..........................
    Hands-free communication.........

    Additional Services.........

    116

    114

    Personal Calling: ........................

    116

    114
    114
    115
    115
    115
    115
    115

    Virtual Advisor: ...............
    OnStar Subscriber
    Website ..........................

    120

    Limitations.......................

    121

    Additional Information....

    122

    Warranty ....................................
    A Note About Privacy .................
    Transferring OnStar....................
    OnStar Subscription Information

    122
    122
    122
    122

    114

    The OnStar Premium
    Services Plan * .............
    Route support .............................
    Ride Assist..................................
    Information and Convenience services ...........................................
    Concierge services .....................

    115
    115
    115
    115
    116

    121



  • Page 112

    112

    OnStar - Telematics

    Your new vehicle comes equipped with
    advanced telematics hardware and one full
    year of Onstar Premium Service. Saab
    Telematics is a sophisticated in-vehicle
    system allowing convergence of wireless
    communications, GPS (Global Positioning
    System) satellites and advanced vehicle
    electronics.
    You must activate immediately to ensure
    you receive your full year of service, as your
    prepaid subscription begins at the time of
    delivery.
    Here’s how to activate your OnStar service:
    1 Push the blue OnStar button located in
    your Saab. After a prerecorded message explaining the benefits of onStar,
    you will be greeted by a live OnStar advisor. The advisor will activate your
    OnStar service.
    2 Provide the information requested by
    the advisor to activate your account and
    set up your personal profile. This will
    take approximately 10-15 minutes.

    Using OnStar
    Welcome to OnStar. This section gives you
    all the information you need to get started
    using OnStar, including descriptions of all
    OnStar services. It also introduces the
    added services of Personal Calling, Virtual
    advisor, and the Onstar Subscriber website.
    For a complete explanation of these additional services, please see pages 116, 120
    and 121.
    NOTE: In order for OnStar to operate, the
    car audio system must be switched on.

    OnStar is Easy
    It’s easy to start using your OnStar system.
    In fact, pressing the OnStar button is usually
    all you need to do. Once you are connected,
    an OnStar advisor will help you with the services in your plan.
    Inoperative if battery is discharge or disconnected.
    OnStar is powered by your vehicle´s battery
    and will not operate if the battery is discharged or disconnected.
    Potentially inoperative if vehicle is in a
    crash
    If your vehicle is in a crash, some components could be damaged or disconnected,
    potentially rendering OnStar inoperative.

    Your onboard OnStar System consists of
    three buttons:
    OnStar Services Button
    Press this button, and you are
    connected to an OnStar advisor. You will hear a chime, followed by the words
    ”Connecting to OnStar.” Allow
    20-30 seconds for initial connection to the OnStar Call Center. An advisor will then help
    you with any of the services
    included in your OnStar plan.
    If cellular service is unavailable, OnStar will generate a
    fast busy tone. The OnStar system will retry calls a number of
    times before returning to the
    ready mode. To cancel the
    automatic dialing, press the
    White dot button.



  • Page 113

    OnStar - Telematics
    Emergency button
    In an emergency, press this
    button to connect with an
    OnStar advisor. Your call will be
    given the highest priority, and
    you will hear a tone followed by
    the words ”Connecting to
    OnStar Emergency.” An advisor will locate your Saab, find
    out what kind of assistance you
    require, and contact the nearest emergency services provider who can dispatch
    ambulance, fire, police or other
    emergency services. Please
    use this button only for true
    emergencies.
    White dot button
    Press this button at the end of a
    call. You’ll hear the words
    ”OnStar Request Ended.” Also,
    press this button to answer a
    call from the OnStar Center, or
    cancel a call if one of the other
    buttons is accidentally
    pressed. This button is also
    used to access OnStar Personal Calling services which
    are described on page 116.

    System status light
    Solid Green — Indicates the OnStar
    system in the vehicle is powered ON and
    ready to make calls or receive calls from the
    OnStar Center.
    Blinking Green — The light blinks green to
    indicate a call is being connected or in
    progress. If you notice this light blinking
    while you are not on a call, press the White
    dot button.
    Red — This signals that your OnStar
    system may not be functioning properly.
    Press the OnStar button to attempt to contact an OnStar advisor. If the connection is
    made, the advisor will assist you in making
    sure your OnStar system is operating properly. If you cannot contact the OnStar Center, please take your car to the nearest Saab
    dealer for diagnosis and service.

    113

    The OnStar Center is the heart of your service — staffed 24 hours a day, 7 days a
    week with knowledgeable OnStar advisors.
    Even on weekends and holidays, there is
    always someone ready to help.
    OnStar uses sophisticated Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites to locate your
    Saab, and wireless technology to provide
    the communications link and seamless integration into your Saab. This system allows
    the OnStar advisors to pinpoint your Saab´s
    location precisely. This way, advisors can
    provide you with a range of helpful services
    to protect you and your Saab. Plus, with the
    Premium Services Plan* included for 12
    months with your Saab, advisors can also
    access an extensive database to assist you
    with directions, making reservations and
    other convenience services.
    *) New retail deliveries only.



  • Page 114

    114

    OnStar - Telematics

    The OnStar Center

    Your personal identification number
    (PIN)

    Connecting to the OnStar center

    When you signed up with OnStar, you were
    asked to provide a Personal Identification
    Number (PIN). You’ll need your PIN to
    access many of OnStar’s services. If, for
    example, your vehicle has been stolen, an
    OnStar advisor will ask for your PIN in order
    to provide assistance.
    Changing your PIN is easy. Call the OnStar
    Center and provide the advisor with your
    current number, and he or she will assist
    you in setting up a new number. If you have
    forgotten your PIN, just call the OnStar Center. For security reasons, we will send your
    PIN to you in the mail.

    In addition to using the 3-button system
    found in your Saab, there are two other
    ways to connect to the OnStar Center.
    Toll-Free Call
    To take advantage of your OnStar services
    from outside your Saab, you can call OnStar
    toll-free at 1-888-4-OnStar
    (1-888-466-7827). Remember to have your
    Personal Identification Number (PIN)
    handy.
    Automatic Notification
    A priority signal will be sent to the OnStar
    Center with your exact location if an airbag
    deploys.
    (Vehicle electrical system and cellular service
    must be operable.)

    The OnStar Safety and
    Security Plan
    The OnStar Safety and Security Plan is part
    of the Premium Services Plan that comes
    with your vehicle.* With it, you have access
    to a complete range of services providing
    you with an unsurpassed level of safety and
    security — 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
    And you have it all at the touch of a button.
    So whether you’re on a lonesome country
    road or stuck in highway traffic, you have at
    your disposal a complete range of services
    providing you with unsurpassed security.
    And you have it all at the touch of a button.

    Automatic notification of air bag
    deployment
    Should your front air bags deploy, a priority
    signal will be sent to the OnStar Center with
    your Saab´s location (as long as cellular
    service and the vehicle’s electrical system
    are operable). An advisor will attempt to
    contact you to assess the nature of your
    emergency, and then notify the appropriate
    emergency services provider.

    Emergency services
    Should you require emergency assistance,
    press the red emergency button and OnStar
    or an advisor will contact the nearest emergency services provider with your exact
    location and your request for help.
    * New retail deliveries only.



  • Page 115

    OnStar - Telematics
    Roadside assistance**

    OnStar Med-Net***

    There’s nothing worse than being stranded
    on the road with car trouble. No matter what
    the problem is (flat tire, out of gas, or engine
    trouble), just call OnStar. They will contact
    the help you need to get you quickly back on
    the road.

    OnStar MED-NET securely stores your personal medical information (e.g., physician’s
    name, emergency contacts, medications,
    chronic conditions) and, in an emergency,
    can quickly send it to a medical facility. This
    important information can help assist with
    diagnosis and treatment. ****

    Stolen vehicle tracking
    OnStar doesn’t just protect you, it protects
    your Saab, too. If your vehicle is ever stolen,
    just contact OnStar by calling
    1-888-4-ONSTAR. They will put you in
    touch with the authorities and aid them in
    locating your Saab. Ask your insurance carrier about possible premium discounts.

    Accident Assist™
    Accident Assist™ provides step-by-step
    guidance about what to do in case of a
    crash. Working with leading insurance companies On Star has developed a ”best practices” list to assist you through most accident situations. OnStar Accident Assist™
    can make the process of completing a
    police report and/or insurance claim less
    stressful.

    **There will be no charge for Roadside Assistance as
    long as your vehicle is under warranty.
    ***Requires activation and additional fee.
    ****Availability in Canada was undetermined at time of
    pulbication. Please contact your local dealer in Canada.

    Hands-free communication
    Talking to an OnStar advisor is easy and
    hands-free. Simply press the OnStar button, and a small microphone picks up your
    voice while the OnStar advisor talks to you
    through your stereo speakers. Note: Audio
    system must be switched on. You can even
    adjust the volume to your liking with the
    steering wheel controls or the radio volume
    knob. Your hands remain on the steering
    wheel, while your eyes remain on the road.
    Being safe on the road is important, but
    there’s more to life than security. There’s living. That’s why we have created the OnStar
    Premium Services Plan. It gives you not
    only the important protections of the Safety
    and Security Plan, but also a whole range of
    services which truly change driving from a
    chore to a luxury. All new Saab models
    come with one full year of the OnStar Premium Services Plan.*
    * New retail deliveries only.

    115

    The OnStar Premium
    Services Plan *
    Route support
    With OnStar Route Support, an advisor can
    help you find your way, no matter how far off
    course you are. You can get exact street
    directions, or guidance to nearby gas stations, restaurants, hotels or ATMs.

    Ride Assist
    If you need a lift, anytime of the day or night,
    just call OnStar. They’ll contact transportation and send it right to you.

    Information and Convenience services
    OnStar advisors have access to over five
    million service listings including hotels, restaurants, gas stations, dealerships, hospitals, ATMs and airports — more than 250
    service categories in all. OnStar advisors
    can even assist you with hotel and restaurant reservations.
    *All Saab models come with one full year of Premium
    Service. New retail deliveries only.



  • Page 116

    116

    OnStar - Telematics

    Concierge services
    From the simple to the extraordinary,
    OnStar Concierge is always ready to help.
    Whether it’s tickets to that ”hard-to-get”
    play, or even complete planning of your next
    vacation, OnStar Concierge can make all
    the arrangements you need — at home or
    on the road. There is no additional cost to
    you for the efforts of the OnStar Concierge.
    You will not pay more than retail value for
    goods and services, or current market value
    for tickets, specialty items or unique services. For your convenience, they will bill
    your credit card for any purchases and/or
    shipping you authorize.

    Additional Services
    Personal Calling
    As an OnStar Safety and Security Plan or
    Premium Services Plan subscriber, you
    have access to OnStar Personal Calling.
    OnStar Personal Calling provides you with
    a nationwide wireless phone service in your
    Saab that you can activate simply by pressing a button and using your voice. You can
    use Personal Calling in your Saab to place
    or to receive calls. The voice-activated
    system will dial the number. Your party will
    answer through your stereo speakers.
    With OnStar Personal Calling, you can
    enjoy the simplicity of a one-touch wireless
    connection. Whether you are placing or
    receiving a call, once you press the button,
    you never have to take your hands off the
    wheel or your eyes off the road. The ease of
    the hands-free communication service
    allows you to enjoy an even greater level of
    safety, security and convenience while driving.
    This new service is not yet available in all
    areas. Complete availability in the U.S. is
    anticipated in 2001*. For system limitations
    and details, call OnStar at
    1-800-ONSTAR-7.
    * Availability in Canada was undetermined at time of
    publication. Please contact your local dealer in Canada.

    Signing Up for Personal Calling
    As an OnStar subscriber, the Personal Calling capability is already built into your
    Saab’s OnStar hardware. In order to use
    this service, an OnStar advisor must set up
    your cellular account. You must also provide a credit card in order to establish your
    prepaid cellular account. Usage charges
    will be deducted from this prepaid account
    of ”units.” Units are easily replenished using
    the credit card on file at OnStar. Once you
    sign up for OnStar Personal Calling, you will
    be given your own personal phone number
    that others can use to call into your Saab.

    To sign up for Personal Calling,
    simply
    • Press the OnStar button in your Saab.
    • Inform the advisor that you would like to
    sign up for Personal Calling.
    • The advisor will set up your account.
    You will need to provide account and
    credit card information.



  • Page 117

    OnStar - Telematics
    Voice Commands

    Universal Commands

    Personal Calling is made available through
    your voice commands to the system. This
    allows you to verbally control all of the
    phone functions.
    Your OnStar wireless phone system has
    been programmed to respond to a wide variety of voices and accents. You should
    speak distinctly in a normal speaking volume. It is not necessary to exaggerate your
    voice or to speak loudly. Speak numerical
    digits one at a time, and then wait for confirmation before going to the next digit.

    Help – The system will provide a list of available commands.
    Clear – When you are entering digits, this
    command will erase the last digit entered.
    Cancel – This command takes you from the
    current function to the ”Ready” prompt. If the
    last response from the system was ”Ready,”
    this command will exit voice recognition.

    Voice Command Error Messages
    Pardon – The system has not been able to
    match your command with a word that it
    knows. Repeating the command distinctly
    should fix the problem.
    Slower Please – Repeat the command
    after a short pause. This response normally
    happens if you say a command before the
    system is ready for it or if there is substantial
    background noise.

    To dial using a ”Nametag”:
    1 Press the
    OnStar White
    dot button
    2 Say ”CALL”
    3 Say ”<stored
    nametag>”

    Placing a Call
    There are three ways to place a call:
    1 By using a particular number, say ”DIAL”
    2 By using a stored nametag, say ”CALL”
    3 By dialing the last number, say
    ”REDIAL”

    To dial a number:
    1 Press the
    OnStar White
    dot button
    2 Say ”DIAL”

    OnStar will respond
    ”Ready”

    OnStar will respond
    ”Number Please”
    3 Say the 1st
    OnStar will repeat the
    Digit
    number
    4 Say the 2nd
    OnStar will repeat the
    Digit
    number
    Continue saying numbers in this manner until finished
    5 Say ”DIAL”
    OnStar will respond
    ”Dialing <number>,”
    then make the call

    117

    OnStar will respond
    ”Ready”
    OnStar will respond
    ”Nametag Please”
    OnStar will respond
    ”Calling <nametag>”,
    then make the call

    To redial the last number dialed:
    OnStar will respond
    1 Press the
    OnStar White ”Ready”
    dot button
    2 Say ”REDIAL” OnStar will respond
    ”Redialing”, then
    make the call

    Receiving a Call
    If someone calls your wireless phone number, the entertainment system in your Saab
    will mute (if it is on), and you will hear a
    phone ringing sound. To answer the call,
    simply press the White dot button.

    Ending a Call
    When your call is finished, press the White
    dot button to end the call. It is not possible
    to end a call using voice commands.



  • Page 118

    118

    OnStar - Telematics

    Storing/Deleting Numbers in
    Memory

    Deleting a Number from Memory

    Units Remaining

    To delete a nametag:

    OnStar keeps track of the amount of calling
    time you have purchased and used in units.
    The number of total remaining units is
    stored within the OnStar system, and can be
    accessed easily.

    (Nametags)

    Storing a number
    Your OnStar system can store up to 20
    numbers (up to 32 digits each) in memory
    that can be dialed by simply repeating the
    ”nametag.”

    To store a number:
    1 Press the
    OnStar White
    dot button
    2 Say ”STORE”

    OnStar will respond
    ”Ready”

    OnStar will respond
    ”Number Please”
    3 Say the 1st
    OnStar will repeat the
    Digit
    number
    4 Say the 2nd
    OnStar will repeat the
    Digit
    digit
    Continue saying numbers in this manner
    until finished
    5 Say ”STORE” OnStar will respond
    again
    ”Nametag Please”
    6 Say ”<new
    OnStar will respond
    nametag>”
    ”Again”
    7 Say ”<new
    OnStar will respond
    nametag>”
    ”Once More”
    8 Say ”<new
    OnStar will respond
    nametag>”
    ”Storing <nametag>”

    1 Press the
    OnStar will respond
    OnStar White ”Ready”
    dot button
    2 Say ”DELETE” OnStar will respond
    ”Nametag Please”
    3 Say
    OnStar will respond
    ”<nametag>” ”Delete <nametag>,
    YES or NO”
    4 Say ”YES”
    OnStar will respond
    ”Deleting <nametag>”

    Setting Tone or Voice Response
    Your system comes from the factory with
    voice responses to your commands to confirm that the system received the command
    or number you intended. For example,
    when you are entering a number, OnStar
    repeats the number back to you. You may
    change the system to respond with a tone
    response if you prefer. A ready tone, a digit
    tone, or a goodbye tone will respond instead
    of the voice. All other responses will still be
    by voice.
    1 Press the
    OnStar White
    dot button
    2 Say ”Voice
    Feedback”

    OnStar will respond
    ”Ready”
    OnStar will respond
    ”Voice Feedback is
    now ON/OFF”

    1 Press the
    OnStar White
    dot button
    2 Say ”Units”
    3 Say ”Verify”

    OnStar will respond
    ”Ready”
    OnStar will respond
    ”Verify or Add”
    OnStar will respond
    ”You have # units
    remaining”

    Adding More Calling Minutes / Units
    You can charge additional calling units with
    automatic refill by contacting OnStar, or by
    authorizing automatic unit refill on the
    OnStar subscriber website. For more information about the OnStar subscriber website, please see page 121.

    Automatic Replenishment
    If you run out of units during a call, your call
    will be terminated and you will be connected
    to OnStar for approval to replenish. You will
    be warned at the beginning of a call when
    you have ten or fewer calling units remaining.



  • Page 119

    OnStar - Telematics
    Contact OnStar
    1 Press the
    OnStar
    White dot
    button
    2 Say ”Units”
    3 Say ”Add”

    OnStar will respond
    ”Ready”

    OnStar will respond
    ”Verify or Add”
    You will be connected to
    OnStar for replenishment

    You will need your OnStar Personal Identification Number (PIN) to authorize the
    charge to your credit card on file.
    If you are not in your Saab, you may call an
    OnStar Advisor at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
    (1-888-466-7827) to request unit replenishment.

    119

    Security/Locking your System

    Volume Control

    You can set up a four-digit Personal Security Code to ensure that unauthorized
    people do not use the calling capability of
    your system. With security set to ON, the
    system will not allow any personal calls. You
    must turn security OFF before calls can be
    made.

    The volume of the audio portion of Personal
    Calling is controlled with your steering
    wheel volume control or with the radio
    volume knob.

    1 Press the OnStar
    White dot button
    2 Say ”Security”

    3 Say the 1st Digit
    4 Say the 2nd Digit
    5 Say the 3rd Digit
    6 Say the 4th Digit

    OnStar will
    respond ”Ready”
    OnStar will
    respond ”Enter
    Four-Digit Security
    Code”
    OnStar will repeat
    the digit
    OnStar will repeat
    the digit
    OnStar will repeat
    the digit
    OnStar reply
    ”Security (code # #
    # #) is now
    ON/OFF”



  • Page 120

    120

    OnStar - Telematics

    Virtual Advisor
    Once you have activated Personal Calling,
    you can enjoy your time in your Saab even
    more with the OnStar Virtual Advisor. This
    service allows you to listen to your favorite
    news and information topics, such as
    weather reports, stock quotes and sports
    scores. You can even listen to your e-mail,
    whenever you want, without ever taking
    your eyes off the road. Using simple voice
    commands, you can browse your personal
    topics and skip or listen to those you
    choose. You can also search for additional
    information on special topics that interest
    you.
    To find out how to set up a customized profile, visit the OnStar subscriber website at
    www.onstar.com, or turn to the OnStar subscriber website section on page 31 of this
    guide. If you do not have Internet access,
    you can still take advantage of the OnStar
    Virtual Advisor services as a default profile
    will be set up for you.

    Calling the Virtual Advisor
    1 Press the
    OnStar White
    dot button
    2 Say ”Virtual
    Advisor”

    OnStar will respond
    ”Ready”
    You will be connected
    to Virtual Advisor

    Weather
    The OnStar Virtual advisor will deliver an
    up-to-date weather forecast for the current
    location of the vehicle. The forecast
    includes current temperature, daily
    high/low, tomorrow’s high/low, precipitation
    forecast, and unusual conditions.

    Stock Quotes
    Getting Information from the Virtual
    Advisor
    The OnStar Virtual Advisor will prompt you
    for information you desire. These offerings
    will change to provide you with services and
    information that you and other subscribers
    want and need. The prompts are very clear
    and easy to understand and use.

    Information Available
    OnStar will continue to add new features
    and categories to the Virtual Advisor. The
    following general categories will give you an
    overview of the types of information available to you. For complete up-to-date categories, you can go to the Saab Cars USA,
    Inc. website at www.saabusa.com or the
    OnStar website at www.onstar.com, and
    then click on the link to the subscriber website.

    The OnStar Virtual advisor can provide you
    with current quotes for the stocks you have
    specified in your customized profile as well
    as other requested stocks. All market data
    is delayed by twenty minutes. If you have
    not set your profile, you can still access the
    stock quote feature through your default
    profile and then request the stock of your
    choice.

    Sports Scores
    The OnStar Virtual advisor can provide you
    with scores for your favorite college and professional teams with up-to-the- minute highlights, even if they are being broadcast on a
    local station. See the team selection option
    in your Mobile Profiler section of the subscriber section of OnStar.com.
    If you have not set your profile or are still
    using the default profile, you can access the
    sports option of the Virtual advisor and ask
    for an update on your favorite sport. You
    always have access to the options in the Virtual Advisor.



  • Page 121

    OnStar - Telematics
    News Headlines
    The OnStar Virtual Advisor will provide current headlines for many different categories, including:







    International News Headlines
    National News Headlines
    Technology Headlines
    Business Headlines
    Sports Headlines
    Entertainment Headlines

    E-mail Reader
    The OnStar Virtual Advisor allows you to listen, and soon respond, to your e-mails any
    time you want. E-mail availability is based
    on the address(es) you provide to OnStar.
    Every Virtual Advisor enrollee will receive
    an E-mail account.

    OnStar Subscriber
    Website
    As an OnStar subscriber, you have access
    to the OnStar subscriber website. The subscriber website will provide you with important facts about your OnStar subscription
    and allow you to customize your Virtual
    Advisor Mobile Profile. All this allows you to
    access up-to-the-minute information that
    can make your driving experience safer and
    more enjoyable.
    The subscriber website was designed to
    provide you with easy access to personalized information, learn more about OnStar,
    update your account information, plan your
    travel, receive weather information and
    interact with OnStar.
    You can also act like an OnStar advisor and
    pinpoint your Saab. To access the subscriber website, simply go to
    www.onstar.com, and then click on the
    OnStar subscriber link. The OnStar Subscriber website is a secured site that is
    password protected. You will be required to
    provide your OnStar account number and
    personal identification number (PIN). If you
    do not know your account number or PIN,
    contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR. For
    security reasons, your PIN will be mailed to
    your address on record.

    121

    Limitations
    Not withstanding anything contained
    herein, OnStar's nonperformance hereunder shall be excused if caused by act or
    omission of a cellular carrier or a third-party
    service provider, equipment failure, acts of
    God, strikes, equipment or facility shortage,
    or other causes beyond OnStar’s reasonable control. In addition, the liability of
    OnStar, if any, for any mistake, omission,
    interruption, delay, error, defect or other failure in the service furnished, or in the equipment used in furnishing service, shall in no
    event exceed the amount of OnStar’s
    charges to subscriber for said service
    during the period so affected, provided that
    no liability shall result for outages of 24
    hours or less.
    This manual includes the latest information
    at the time it was printed. We reserve the
    right to make changes to the products and
    services without prior notification.
    In order to provide you with excellent service, any call to the OnStar Center may be
    monitored or recorded.
    All features may not be available on all models. Please consult your dealer for details.



  • Page 122

    122

    OnStar - Telematics

    OnStar Operation:
    OnStar uses existing emergency service
    providers and cellular and satellite technologies. OnStar requires cellular service to be
    available and operating for features to function properly.

    Personal Calling:
    Existing OnStar service agreement
    required. Additional usage charges apply
    for Personal Calling. Interim 2001 model
    year availability in select markets. For
    system limitations and details, call
    1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.

    Virtual Advisor:
    Existing OnStar and Personal Calling service agreement required. Additional usage
    charges apply for Personal Calling. Interim
    2001 model year availability in select markets. For system limitations and details, call
    1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.

    Additional Information
    Warranty
    OnStar is warranted as part of the General
    Motors new vehicle limited warranty.
    A Note About Privacy
    At OnStar, we know you want to protect your
    privacy, and we take subscriber privacy
    very seriously. We never provide your personal information to another company or
    person unless you authorize it, or we are
    required to by the legal process, or in such
    cases where you have provided it for billing
    purposes or you have requested a hotel reservation, are sending flowers, etc. Having
    this information on file with OnStar is a real
    advantage and helps you avoid repeating
    your credit card information over a cellular
    connection. Your trust is what we most
    value.

    Transferring OnStar
    Because your OnStar 3-button system is an
    integral part of your Saab, it cannot be transferred to another vehicle. Each OnStar
    system stays with the original car or truck in
    which it was installed.
    The one-year OnStar prepaid subscription
    applicable to new retail deliveries cannot be
    transferred to another vehicle. However, if
    you’ve purchased additional years of service and decide to dispose of your Saab,
    any remaining service will be refunded to
    you. Or, if you choose, you can have it transferred to another vehicle on your account.
    Any service that is refunded or transferred
    will be prorated at the monthly rate in effect
    at the time of transfer.

    OnStar Subscription Information
    To renew your subscription or upgrade your
    plan, just push the OnStar button, or call the
    OnStar customer service department at
    1-888-864-2801 between 8 am and 6 pm
    EST.



  • Page 123

    Interior equipment, trunk

    123

    IB941

    Interior equipment,
    trunk
    Seats .................................
    Steering-wheel adjustment ................................
    Electrical windows...........
    Sunroof .............................
    Interior lighting.................
    Cup holder ........................
    Ashtrays (accessory).......
    Glove compartment .........
    Rearview mirrors..............
    Trunk, Coupé and 5-door
    Tools and spare wheel ....
    Manually opening the fuel
    filler door ........................

    124
    131
    130
    132
    133
    134
    135
    135
    137
    138
    143
    144



  • Page 124

    124

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Seats

    WARNING
    Never adjust the driver’s seat except
    when the car is stationary.

    Side airbags (SRS)
    See page 30.

    Head restraint
    See page 18.

    IB801

    • Height (driver´s seat)
    • Legroom
    • Backrest rake angle
    • Lumbar support
    • Head-restraint height
    We recommend that adjustments to the
    driver’s seat be performed in the following
    order:
    1 Height
    2 Legroom
    3 Backrest rake angle
    Lastly, adjust the steering wheel (see
    page 131).

    IB803

    The following seat adjustments can be
    made to achieve a comfortable driving
    position:

    Height adjustment, driver’s seat

    Legroom adjustment

    Lift the lever to raise the seat. The lever is
    spring-loaded to return to its neutral position. Repeated lifting of the lever will
    increase the height in steps.
    Press down the lever to lower the seat.
    Repeated downward presses of the lever
    will lower the seat in steps.

    Lift the lever under the front of the seat and
    slide the seat to the desired position.

    WARNING
    Check that the seat is locked in the new
    position - if not, it may move while the car
    is being driven. If the fore-and-aft setting
    of the seat has not been locked, it could
    result in injury to the occupant in the event
    of a crash.



  • Page 125

    Interior equipment, trunk

    125

    Backrest rake angle
    To find the most comfortable position, turn
    the knob to provide stepless adjustment of
    the backrest.

    WARNING

    Adjusting the backrest
    1 Catch, backrest (Coupé and Convertible
    versions)

    Front seats, Coupé and
    Convertible versions
    Both front seats have release levers on the
    outside of the backrest. The passenger seat
    also has a release on the inside of the backrest so that the driver can tilt the backrest for
    the convenience of rear-seat passengers.
    Raise the release levers to tip the backrest
    forward.

    IB804

    IB802

    The backrest should be upright during
    driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
    backrest can provide optimum protection
    in the event of emergency braking or a
    crash.

    Lumbar support
    Turn the smaller knob for stepless adjustment of the lumbar support.



  • Page 126

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Manually adjustable front seats with
    ”Easy Entry” function, Coupé and
    Convertible versions
    Manual seats have a feature called ”Easy
    Entry”, which facilitates movement to and
    from the rear seat.

    Activate ”Easy Entry” as follows:
    1 Raise the release lever and hold it in its
    uppermost position until the backrest is
    tipped forward.
    2 Slide the seat forward. The whole seat is
    now shifted to its forward position.
    Resetting:
    1 Slide the seat back to the desired
    position.
    2 Fold the backrest to the upright position.
    Lock the front to rear seat adjustment.
    After resetting you should ensure that the
    backrest and seat are properly secured.

    WARNING
    • Always check that the catch engages
    properly after the backrest is raised.
    • Check also that the seat’s lateral
    adjuster is properly secured by trying
    to shift the seat. Both the backrest and
    the whole seat must be locked in
    place; otherwise you are at risk of
    injury during braking or in a crash
    especially if a rear-facing child seat is
    fitted behind the backrest..

    IB805

    126

    Manually adjusted front seat, Coupé and
    Convertible versions
    1 Release lever, tipping backrest forward
    2 Activation of the ”Easy Entry” feature when
    the backrest is tipped forward



  • Page 127

    Interior equipment, trunk

    127

    Electrically adjustable front seats
    (certain variants)
    WARNING
    The seats are actuated by powerful
    motors. Bear this in mind when adjusting
    the seat, and make sure that nothing gets
    caught and damaged.

    Both seats can be operated from outside
    when one of the front doors is opened, to
    improve access to the car.
    For safety reasons, if the door is closed, the
    seat can only be adjusted when the ignition
    is ON.
    Note, that both front seats can be adjusted
    up to 30 seconds after the door has been
    closed.

    IB806

    Always remove the ignition key when you
    leave the car to prevent personal injury
    caused by the electrically adjustable
    seats, for example, due to children playing.

    IB807

    Bear in mind that children can be injured
    if they play with the electrically-operated
    seats.

    Height

    Legroom adjustment

    Raise the seat by lifting the front switch bar
    straight up.
    Lower the seat by pushing the front switch
    bar down.
    The same switch bar can be used to adjust
    the height of the front and rear edges of the
    seat independently by moving half of the
    switch in the direction desired.

    For power seats, slide the switch bar forward or rearward to the desired position.



  • Page 128

    128

    Interior equipment, trunk
    Memory function (certain variants)

    Backrest rake angle
    Push the rear lever forward or rearward to
    adjust the rake angle of the backrest.

    1 Make the desired adjustments to the
    seat setting.
    2 Store the setting of the seat by keeping
    the ”M” depressed and at the same time
    pressing one of the memory buttons, 1,
    2 or 3. The SID will acknowledge storage with a chime.
    When you next wish to activate the memory
    function, keep the desired memory button
    depressed while the seat adopts the programmed settings.
    To change any of the three programmed
    settings, repeat stages 1 and 2.

    IB809

    IB808

    In some variants the electrically adjustable
    driver’s seat has a memory function. Three
    different settings can be programmed.



  • Page 129

    IB810

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Electrically heated front seats
    (option on some model variants/markets)
    Both front seats can be equipped with heating for the seat cushion and backrest. It is
    switched on and off using the buttons on the
    instrument panel.
    The heating is thermostatically controlled. It
    comes on when the temperature of the seat
    cushion goes below 79°F (26°C) and turns
    off when it reaches 97°F (36°C).
    Shut off the heating once the seat is warm.

    129



  • Page 130

    130

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Electrical windows
    • Bear in mind the pinch hazard when
    the side windows are being raised.
    Make sure that all passengers keep
    their heads, hands and fingers clear of
    the window openings before you begin
    raising the windows. Serious personal
    injury may otherwise be caused.
    • Always remove the ignition key when
    leaving the car to avoid the danger of
    injury arising from unattended children
    operating the windows.
    The electric window motors are equipped
    with overload protection. If this protection
    should trip, wait several seconds before
    operating the electric windows again.

    To open

    IB245

    WARNING

    1 Control, sunroof (soft top operation, Convertible)
    2 Window switches, front
    3 Control for disengaging the window switches at the rear

    To close
    Lift the symbol side of the button.
    The actuating motor will be switched off
    automatically when the window is fully
    closed or when the switch is released.

    Extra button for the rear window operator

    IB829

    Press the window symbol on the button.
    The switches for the front windows have a
    third position for automatic opening of the
    window. Press the switch down all the way
    to lower the window completely.
    To cancel automatic lowering of the window, lift the switch briefly.



  • Page 131

    Interior equipment, trunk

    131

    IB811

    The window switches on the rear doors can
    be rendered inoperative by the ON/OFF
    switch in the panel on the center console.
    When the switch is ON, the rear side windows can be operated by the switch on each
    rear door. The rear door switches have an
    integrated indicator lamp that indicates
    when the switches are operational.
    When the switch is OFF, the rear side windows can only be operated from the panel
    on the center console. The indicator lamps
    are extinguished when the switches are not
    operational.

    IB1536

    Child safety: rear windows
    (ON/OFF)

    Lever for steering-wheel adjustment

    Steering-wheel
    adjustment
    The steering wheel can be positioned
    fore-and-aft by pulling the lever to the left.
    Set the steering wheel to the desired position and return the lever to the locked status.

    WARNING
    For safety reasons, you should adjust the
    steering wheel only while the car is stationary.

    Horn signal
    The horn is operated by pressing at the
    outer edges of the airbag module in the
    center of the steering wheel.



  • Page 132

    Sunroof
    WARNING
    • Bear in mind the pinch hazard when
    operating the sunroof. Make sure that
    all passengers keep their heads,
    hands and fingers clear of the opening
    before operating the sunroof. Serious
    personal injury may otherwise be
    caused.
    • Always remove the ignition key when
    you leave the car to prevent personal
    injury caused by the sunroof, for
    example, due to children playing.

    The sunroof is operated electrically using
    the ROOF control on the center console.
    The sunroof can be opened completely or
    partially. As soon as you release the control
    the sunroof stops.
    1 If you wish to open the sunroof all the
    way from the closed position, proceed
    as follows:
    • To open: slide the control rearward.
    • To close: slide the control forward and
    hold it forward until all movement of the
    sunroof stops, indicating it is fully
    closed.
    2 You also have the option of opening the
    rear edge of the sunroof from the closed
    position for the purpose of ventilation.
    • To open: slide the control forwards.
    • To close: slide the control rearwards.

    IB831

    Interior equipment, trunk

    IB830

    132

    But you must release the control after each
    position so as to shift between the two
    functions.
    The sunroof also has an inner sun blind that
    slides by hand.

    Emergency operation of the sunroof
    The sunroof can be operated manually with
    a screwdriver, e.g. in the case of an electrical fault. Slide back the cover on the roof
    console. Insert a screwdriver into the slot in
    the center of the motor shaft and turn
    Turn clockwise to open the sunroof.
    Turn counterclockwise if the sunroof is open
    at the rear edge.



  • Page 133

    Rear-seat lighting

    1 Interior lighting is off
    2 Lighting comes on when a door is opened
    3 Interior lighting on continuously

    Interior lighting
    The interior lighting consists of one dome
    light in the front and one in the back. The
    switch for the interior lighting is on the overhead panel next to the rearview mirror.
    When the switch is in the mid-position
    (door-activated), the interior lighting will
    come on:
    • When the car is unlocked from outside.
    • When any door is opened with the ignition
    off.
    • When the ignition key is withdrawn from
    the switch.

    133

    IB951

    IB832

    Interior equipment, trunk

    1 Reading lights
    2 Dome light

    The lighting goes out about 12 seconds
    after the doors are closed or when the ignition is turned on, provided that the switch is
    in the mid-position.
    If the doors are left open and the switch is in
    position 2 or 3 with the ignition off, the interior lighting is turned off automatically after
    20 minutes to preserve battery life.
    The sun visors are equipped with vanity mirrors. On certain model variants, the sun
    visors are fitted with vanity lighting, which
    turns on when the cover is lifted.
    9-3 Convertible: see page 58.

    Trunk lighting
    The trunk lighting is switched on and off
    when you open and close the trunk, if the
    switching button is set to ON. The lighting
    can also be switched on and off using the
    button on the light.



  • Page 134

    Sun visor with vanity mirror

    IB833

    IB1177

    Interior equipment, trunk

    IB1329

    134

    Cup holder in fascia

    Cup holder in the center console

    Cup holder

    NOTE

    There are two cupholders, one in the fascia
    under the SID unit and one in the center-console compartment between the front
    seats on certain models.
    Next to the cup holder between the front
    seats is a coin tray.

    Be careful not to spill any drinks or liquid
    onto the audio system when using the can
    holders.



  • Page 135

    Front ashtray

    Rear ashtray

    135

    IB835

    IB836

    IB834

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Glove compartment
    1 To unlock
    2 To lock

    Ashtrays (accessory)
    The car can be equipped with two ashtrays.
    One is positioned low down on the dash and
    the other on the back of the center console.
    Open the front ashtray by lightly pressing on
    the front. Remove it by depressing the catch
    on the underside. You do not need to open
    it in order to take it out. To replace it, just
    push it straight in.

    Open the rear ashtray by lightly pulling its
    upper edge rearward. Remove it by
    depressing the catch and opening it past the
    catch point.
    To put it back, align it with the two locating
    pins on either side of the opening, then push
    it closed.
    The cigarette lighter socket can also be
    used as a power supply for a mobile phone
    or other electrical accessory.

    WARNING
    The maximum output that can be taken
    from the cigarette lighter socket is 240 W
    (20 A).

    Glove compartment
    WARNING
    The glove compartment must be closed
    while travelling. An open glove compartment door could cause leg injuries in the
    event of a crash.
    For additional storage compartments see
    next page.



  • Page 136

    IB1518

    Front edge of front seats

    Center console between the seats

    Center console on passenger side

    Front seat backrests

    IB1521

    In the doors

    IB1520

    IB1519

    Interior equipment, trunk

    IB1517

    136



  • Page 137

    Rearview mirror

    Adjusting the door mirrors

    1 Day position
    2 Night position

    1 Select mirror
    2 Use touch pad to adjust mirror

    Rearview mirrors
    The rear-view mirror has day/night positions
    that can be selected by means of a knob
    beneath the mirror. Adjust the mirror for best
    vision in the day position and pull the tab on
    the bottom of the mirror toward you for the
    night position.

    Door mirrors
    The door mirrors are electrically adjustable.
    The controls are on the driver’s door.
    1 Use the upper button to select a door
    mirror.
    2 Use the touch pad to set the mirror vertically and horizontally. There are raised
    points at the 12, 3, 6 and 9 o’clock positions to indicate adjustment points.
    The mirror glass can also be adjusted manually by gently pressing the glass in the
    desired direction.
    If subjected to a certain force, the whole
    mirror will fold back to prevent injury.

    137

    IB814

    IB812

    IB813

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Retracting a mirror
    The mirror can also be retracted by hand,
    which can be useful when parking in confined spaces, e.g. on car ferries. Don’t forget
    to fold the mirrors out again before driving
    away.
    The electric heating of the door mirrors is
    switched on and off with the same button as
    the heating of the rear window.

    NOTE
    The door mirrors should be retracted
    before the car is put through an automatic
    carwash.



  • Page 138

    138

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Trunk, Coupé and 5-door
    WARNING

    When the entire rear seat has been lowered, you must remove the
    rear window shelf. Otherwise it could come loose and cause personal injury during a crash.

    Trunk lid lock
    Unlock the trunk lid by pressing
    on the key, by pressing the
    remote release button on the driver’s door or by using the key. The
    alarm horn sounds three times and the lights flash when the trunk is
    released with the remote control.
    Programming features, see page 245.

    IB850

    When the back seat has been put back in place, make certain that
    the belt beam is locked firmly on both sides (the red warning tabs
    must go down). This is vital since the upper anchorages for the
    safety belts are located in the belt beam. The belts will not
    restrain a rear seat occupant if the belt beam is not properly
    latched.

    Lowering the entire rear seat
    To lower the rear seat, the front seats must be moved forward if they
    are in the most rearward position. The seat back must be almost vertical.
    1 Flip up the seat bottom by pulling the loops located between the
    backrest cushions and seat cushions.
    2 Rest the seat cushions on edge just behind the front seats.
    3 Release the entire backrest cushion, including the belt beam, by
    pressing in the latch in the handle on the left (driver’s) side. After
    this has been done, the fact that the belt beam has been
    released is indicated by the red "warning tabs" popping up on the
    right and left sides of the beam. For increased load capacity with
    the backrest cushion down, remove the rear seat head restraints
    (5).



  • Page 139

    Interior equipment, trunk
    4 Lower the entire backrest cushion by pulling this same handle
    (item 3) forward. At the same time, pivot the beam backwards.
    IMPORTANT: When you replace the belt beam using the handle
    (item 3), you must verify that it is properly locked and that the two
    red "warning tabs" go down (thereby indicating that locking has
    taken place properly).
    5 To increase the volume, the rear head restraints can be removed
    before the backrest cushion is lowered.

    WARNING
    Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During sunny
    weather the temperature in the cabin/luggage compartment can
    climb to 160-180°F (70-80°C). Small children are very susceptible
    to heat stroke.
    The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot during
    driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading the car so
    that children, for example, do not burn themselves.

    139

    Lowering the right-hand part of the rear seat
    WARNING
    • If the head restraints have been removed, they must be stored
    safely so that they cannot be thrown about and injure someone
    while braking or in a crash.
    • Do not ride in the rear seat without having remounted the head
    restraints, and making sure they are properly locked in place.
    • Whenever you handle any system containing moving parts,
    such as the belt beam, always be careful not to get pinched.
    • Never keep objects on the rear window shelf since they can be
    thrown forward and cause personal injury during heavy braking or in the event of a crash.
    • When the back seat has been put back in place, make certain
    that the belt beam is locked firmly on both sides (the red warning tabs must go down). This is vital since the upper anchorages for the safety belts are located in the belt beam. The
    belts will not restrain a rear seat occupant if the belt beam is
    not properly latched



  • Page 140

    140

    Interior equipment, trunk

    To provide more flexibility, the rear seat is divided so that you can
    lower the narrower (right) part separately.

    IB1308

    1 Tilt the seat cushion forward by pulling the loop located between
    the backrest and the seat cushion.
    2 Stand the seat cushion on end behind the front seats.
    3 Release the right backrest cushion by means of the latch on the
    belt beam’s right side just behind the head restraint.
    4 Lower the right backrest cushion.
    IMPORTANT: When you replace the right backrest cushion, make
    certain that it is properly locked.

    IB852

    Warning tabs



  • Page 141

    Removing the parcel shelf
    1 Open the trunk lid.
    2 Unhook the rubber ties.
    3 Lift the rear parcel shelf and pull it away from the guide pins in
    the front edge of the shelf support.

    141

    IB090

    IB853

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Load opening (trunk pass through)
    A load opening is provided in the backrest so that you can carry long
    narrow objects.
    Switch off the engine and set the parking brake before loading or
    unloading long objects. Otherwise, there is risk that you will inadvertently bump the gear/selector lever and the car could start moving.
    1 Lower the rear armrest.
    2 Open the cover by lifting the locking handle.



  • Page 142

    142

    Interior equipment, trunk
    WARNING

    IB854

    Load opening:

    Tie downs
    Four tie downs for securing the load are
    fitted inside the trunk. Place the load as far
    in as possible.

    Trunk lighting
    To the left in the trunk is a light which goes
    on and off when the trunk lid is opened and
    closed.
    The lighting can also be turned on and off
    using the button on the light housing. If the
    trunk lid is left open, the lighting will go off
    after 20 minutes to prevent the battery from
    being drained.

    Always secure a load properly. You can,
    for example, use the hip strap in the
    center rear safety belt. This will reduce
    the risk of having the load thrown about
    during a crash and causing personal
    injury.
    Trunk:
    Lay heavy suitcases flat on the floor.
    Then place smaller and lighter items of
    luggage on top.
    Always secure heavy, bulky loads to the
    four tie downs in the trunk. This will
    reduce risk of having them thrown about
    during heavy braking or during a crash
    and causing personal injury. When the
    backrest is lowered, narrow objects can
    also be thrown around and cause injury.
    You should thus secure them well.
    To retain the car’s safe normal handling
    characteristics, you must be careful not to
    exceed its maximum load capacity, (see
    page 234).
    The tail pipe of the exhaust system can
    become very hot during driving. Bear this
    in mind when loading and unloading the
    car so that children, for example, do not
    burn themselves.

    WARNING
    • Never place any objects on top of the
    rear parcel shelf. In the event of a
    crash, unsecured cargo may present a
    safety hazard and cause personal
    injuries to vehicle occupants.
    • Do not obstruct outward vision or the
    ability to exit the vehicle when loading
    the vehicle.
    • When the rear seat backrest is placed
    upright after having been folded forward, ensure that all rear safety belts
    are accessible and properly routed.
    • Make sure that tire pressures are
    properly adjusted in accordance with
    altered vehicle weight (refer to tire
    pressures in the Specifications section of this manual).



  • Page 143

    IB1890

    IB1932

    Trunk Release Handle

    Trunk Release Handle
    There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
    handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
    This handle will glow following exposure to
    light. Pull the release handle down to open
    the trunk from the inside.

    NOTE
    The trunk release handle was not
    designed to be used to tie down the trunk
    lid or as a an anchor point when securing
    items in the trunk. Improper use of the
    trunk release could damage it.

    Tools and spare wheel
    The tool kit and compact spare wheel are
    kept beneath the carpeting in the trunk.
    The screwdriver handle has a "button" for
    removing a certain type of plastic rivet.

    WARNING
    After use, return tools and the spare
    wheel to their designated locations to
    reduce the risk of personal injury in the
    event of a crash.

    143

    IB1259

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Rear spoiler, Saab 9-3 Viggen.

    WARNING
    Saab 9-3 Viggen Coupé: Avoid placing
    your hands on the upper part of the rear
    fender when the tailgate is to be closed
    because of the risk of getting finger
    caught between the spoiler and the
    fender.



  • Page 144

    144

    Interior equipment, trunk

    Manually opening the
    fuel filler door
    If the fuel filler door (which is controlled by
    the central locking system) does not unlock,
    proceed as follows.
    Check fuse 25. If it is blown or its replacement blows, you can release the lock motor
    from the door as follows:
    1 Use a sharp knife to release the pre-cut
    rectangle on the right in the upholstery in
    the trunk so that you can access the two
    retaining screws that secure the lock
    motor to the fuel filler door.
    2 Unscrew the retaining screws somewhat and back them out through the
    screw holes, whereupon the lock motor
    will be released from the door.
    Have an authorized Saab dealer investigate
    the problem.
    Manually opening the fuel filler door, Convertible, see page 58.

    IB860

    Coupé and 5-door models

    1 Cutout outline in the upholstery of the trunk
    2 Undo the retaining screws of the lock motor
    3 Remove the screws through the screw
    holes



  • Page 145

    Starting and driving

    145

    IB943

    Starting and driving
    Ignition switch .................
    Starting the engine..........
    Important considerations
    for driving.......................
    Refueling ..........................
    Engine Break-in Period...
    Manual transmission ......
    Automatic transmission .
    Cruise Control .................
    Braking .............................
    Traction Control System
    Parking .............................
    Economical motoring .....

    146
    147
    148
    151
    155
    155
    156
    163
    164
    166
    168
    170

    Driving in cold weather ...
    Driving in hot weather .....
    Towing a trailer ................
    Driving with a roof rack
    load..................................
    Driving with the trunk lid
    open ................................
    Driving in deep water.......
    Towing the car..................
    Jump starting ...................
    Driving considerations
    with compact spare
    wheel/tire fitted...............
    For long trips....................

    171
    173
    173
    176
    179
    179
    179
    181

    184
    184



  • Page 146

    146

    Starting and driving

    IB862

    LOCK position
    Put the gear lever in reverse and turn the ignition key to the LOCK position.
    For cars with automatic transmission, select the Parking (P) position
    and turn the ignition key to the LOCK position.
    The gear lever is now locked. The key can only be removed when the
    gear lever is in this position.
    The parking lights, the hazard warning lights and the interior lighting can
    still be illuminated.

    Ignition switch
    The single lock used for both the ignition
    and gear/selector lever is in the center console located between the front seats. Before
    you can remove the key, the car must be in
    reverse gear (manual gearbox cars) or the
    Parking (P) position (cars with automatic
    transmission).
    The key for this lock also fits all other locks
    in the car. The key number is on a small
    plastic tag delivered together with the keys.
    Be sure to save this plastic tab since it has
    the key number on it.

    OFF position
    Gear lever is not locked (manual transmission).
    Automatic transmission: gear lever is locked until brake pedal is
    depressed.

    ON position
    The entire electrical system is operative. Do not leave the key in the
    ON position while the engine is not running. Turn the key to the
    LOCK position to disconnect the electrical system.
    When you turn the key to the ON position, the warnings and indicators
    in the main instrument light so that you can check to see that they are
    functioning properly. They are extinguished after approx. 3 seconds.
    Start position (ST)
    The starter motor operates in this position. When you release the key,
    it springs back to the ON position. Restarting the starter motor is prevented. If starting is unsuccessful, you must turn the key back to a position between OFF and LOCK before you can turn it to the start (ST)
    position again.



  • Page 147

    Starting and driving

    Starting the engine
    WARNING
    • Always remove the key before leaving
    the car.
    • Always apply the parking brake before
    removing the ignition key.

    NOTE
    Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
    crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
    liquid gets into it, the switch may not
    operate properly.

    If the car does not start
    If the text "KEY NOT ACCEPTED" appears
    on the SID when the engine refuses to start,
    the trouble may be a fault in the transponder
    of the key or in the receiver of the ignition
    switch. Proceed as follows:
    • Turn the key back to the LOCK position.
    • Turn the key to the ON position.
    • Press one of the buttons on the remote
    control (the LED on top of the dash stops
    flashing).
    • Start the engine.
    Try the other key. If it works, the trouble is in
    the first key.
    Call on an authorized Saab dealer for
    inspection and correction.

    WARNING
    • When starting the engine:
    – Sit down in the driver’s seat.
    – Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the
    gear lever is not in the neutral position, the clutch pedal must be fully
    depressed or the car will jump
    forwards or backwards, which may
    cause a crash.
    – Never start the car from outside the
    vehicle, e.g. through a lowered
    window. This could lead to serious
    personal injury.
    • Engage reverse (R) (position P for
    automatic transmission) to remove the
    ignition key. The key can only be
    removed in this gear position.
    • Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
    odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
    the danger of CO – always open the
    garage doors before starting the
    engine in the garage.
    • There is also a danger of CO poisoning if the exhaust system is leaking.
    • Do not rest or sleep in the car when
    parked with the engine running. There
    is a risk of depressing the accelerator
    which could lead to engine damage.

    147

    Do not run the starter motor for more than
    25 seconds at a time. Wait 20-30 seconds
    before running the starter again, to give the
    battery time to recover.
    Avoid racing the engine or putting a heavy
    load on it before it has warmed up. Let the
    engine idle for at least 10 seconds and then
    drive away as long as the engine oil warning
    light has gone out to enable the engine to
    attain its normal temperature as quickly as
    possible.
    It is possible for air to enter the lubricating
    system in conjunction with an oil or oil-filter
    change, or if the car has been stored for
    some time. This air can cause the hydraulic
    cam followers to emit a ticking noise, which
    can persist for up to 15 minutes after starting. Although this is quite normal and does
    not indicate any malfunction, it is advisable
    not to exceed 3,000 rpm before the noise
    has disappeared.
    The hydraulic cam lifters are completely
    service free; the valve clearance is set up at
    the factory and will not need any subsequent adjustment.



  • Page 148

    148

    Starting and driving

    Starting the engine

    Useful tips on cold climate starting

    The engine has an automatic choke and
    should be started as follows:
    Cars with manual gearbox
    To start the engine the clutch pedal must
    be fully depressed.
    1 Depress the clutch pedal but do not
    touch the accelerator.
    2 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
    spring back as soon as the engine has
    started and is running smoothly – at very
    low temperatures, you may need to run
    the starter for up to 50 seconds.
    Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds. Do
    not open the throttle wide for at least
    2-3 minutes after starting.
    Cars with automatic transmission
    The selector lever must be in the P or N
    position.

    If the engine has failed to start after several
    attempts in very cold weather, press and
    hold the accelerator down to the floor and
    run the starter for 5–10 seconds. This will
    prevent the engine being flooded (excessively rich fuel-air mixture).
    Now start the engine in the normal way – do
    not touch the accelerator.
    If the engine stalls immediately after starting
    (e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
    do not touch the accelerator when restarting
    the engine.
    Every time the engine is switched off the
    spark plugs are automatically cleaned. If
    your attempt to start nevertheless fails, let
    go of the ignition key and allow it to spring
    back. This initiates more vigorous cleaning
    of the sparking plugs which goes on for
    about 5 seconds. Then start in the ordinary
    way. Do not touch the accelerator; if the
    accelerator is pressed to the floor the fuel
    supply is shut off.

    1 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
    2 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
    spring back as soon as the engine has
    started and is running smoothly – at very
    low temperatures, you may need to run
    the starter for up to 50 seconds.
    Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds. Do
    not open the throttle wide for at least
    2–3 minutes after starting.

    Important
    considerations for
    driving
    The engine-management system in the
    Saab 9-3 is called Saab Trionic T7. The
    system manages the ignition, fuel injection
    and turbo boost pressure.
    The Trionic T7 system developed by Saab
    is an intelligent engine-management
    system designed to achieve optimum driveability under differing driving conditions.
    The system makes adjustments automatically, for instance, if the car is being driven
    at altitude (oxygen-deficient air), for different grades of fuel (AON 87–93) and for different load conditions.
    1 Starting and driving
    • Refrain from using full throttle before
    the engine has warmed up (before
    needle is in the mid-range on temperature gauge) to avoid unnecessary
    wear. If the needle of the pressure
    gauge repeatedly enters the red zone
    the engine may suddenly lose power,
    owing to the intervention of a monitoring system which curtails the charging
    pressure. Get in touch with an authorized Saab dealer at once.
    • A safety function prevents the engine
    from reving faster than 6,200 rpm by
    temporarily shutting of the fuel injectors.



  • Page 149

    Starting and driving
    2 Stopping the engine
    • Do not rev the engine immediately
    before switching it off - stop the engine
    when it is idling.
    3 Regulating the charging pressure
    • The system is optimized for fuel with an
    octane rating of AON 90. For cars with
    205 hp engines and the Viggen, the
    system is optimized for AON 93. One of
    the advantages of the system is that it
    enables the engine to be run safely on
    lower-grade fuel, although not lower
    than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall off slightly, and heavy
    loading should be avoided. For best
    performance you should use the recommended grade of fuel, AON 90
    (205 hp engine and Viggen AON 93).
    • The maximum boost pressure is
    adjusted automatically to the knocking
    or pinging tendency of the engine.
    Occasional, short-lived knocking when
    the engine is under a heavy load is perfectly normal; the extent will depend on
    the grade of fuel in the tank.
    • Isolated instances of knocking are
    more likely to occur with low-octane
    fuel. This controlled form of knocking,
    followed by a reduction in the boost
    pressure, is a sign that the wastegate is
    functioning and is perfectly safe for the
    engine.

    Saab 9-3 Viggen: The Saab 9-3 Viggen has
    a high-performance engine which means
    that a certain amount of care should be
    exercised, in particular when accelerating in
    the lower gears. This is especially important
    when the road surface is slippery to avoid
    the driving wheels from losing their grip.

    NOTE
    If constant knocking occurs every time a
    load is put on the engine, this indicates a
    malfunction in the system.
    Have the car checked without delay by an
    authorized Saab dealer.

    NOTE
    If the engine is being run with the car on a
    rolling road or dynamometer, longer than
    for a standard state emission inspection,
    to ensure adequate cooling, air must be
    blown into the engine compartment and
    under the car at a rate equivalent to the
    ram-air effect that would be obtained at
    the corresponding road speed.

    149

    Limp-home
    The car’s engine management system has
    a diagnostics function that, once the engine
    has been switched off, checks a number of
    internal functions. If a throttle valve fault is
    detected, the engine management system
    will initiate limp-home mode for the valve.
    This means, for example, that idling speed
    regulation will be impaired, the cruise control system will be inoperative, and the
    capacity of the A/C compressor will be limited.
    When starting the car in limp-home mode at
    temperatures below 32°F (0°C), depress
    the accelerator slightly.
    If the diagnosis function detects any faults in
    the engine management system, the
    “Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)
    “ indicator in the main instrument panel
    will light up (see page 63). The car should
    be checked as soon as possible at an
    authorized Saab dealer.



  • Page 150

    Starting and driving

    NOTE
    If the CHECK ENGINE warning light
    starts to flash, ease off the accelerator
    slightly. If the light does not cease to flash
    within 5 seconds, stop the car in a suitable place as soon as possible and turn off
    the engine. The car must be towed to an
    authorized Saab dealer.
    If the CHECK ENGINE warning light
    flashes, it indicates that the engine is
    misfiring which can result in damage to
    the catalytic converter.

    Important considerations with catalytic converters
    The catalytic converter is an emission-control device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
    system. It consists of a metal canister with a
    honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
    walls coated in a catalytic layer (mixture of
    precious metals).

    NOTE
    Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
    oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
    the function of the catalytic converter.
    To ensure that the catalytic converter continues to function properly, and also to avoid
    damage to the converter and its associated
    components, the following points must be
    observed:
    • Have the car serviced regularly in accordance with the service program. The fuel
    and ignition systems are particularly
    important in this context.
    • Always be alert to any misfiring of the
    engine (not running on all cylinders) and
    any loss of power or performance. At the
    first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
    and take the car to an authorized Saab
    dealer as soon as possible.

    IB1315

    150

    Engine-management system with catalytic
    converter
    1 Engine control module
    2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)
    3 Catalytic converter

    • If the engine fails to start (in very cold
    weather or if the battery is dead), the car
    can be push started (manual gearbox
    only) or started using jumper cables to a
    donor battery. However, as soon as you
    have started the engine, it is important
    that it runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring,
    allow it to idle for up to five minutes to give
    it time to settle and run smoothly. If, after
    this time, the engine still fails to run properly, turn off the engine and get in touch
    with an authorized Saab dealer for
    advice.



  • Page 151

    Starting and driving
    • Never park the car on dry grass or other
    combustible material. The catalytic converter gets very hot and could therefore
    start a fire.
    • Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
    • If you jump start the car when the engine
    is already up to normal temperature, the
    engine must start to run on all cylinders.
    Stop jump-starting if the engine fails to
    start immediately.

    NOTE
    If the car runs out of fuel, it is possible for
    air to get into the fuel system. If this
    happens, the catalytic converter may
    overheat and be damaged.
    • Failure to follow these directions could
    result in the catalytic converter and associated components being damaged, and
    could represent a breach of the warranty
    conditions.

    Refueling
    WARNING
    • Never use fuel for any purpose other
    than as engine fuel.
    • Gasoline is highly flammable and can
    cause severe burns. Never use an
    exposed flame in the vicinity of gasoline. Never smoke when filling the
    vehicle up with gasoline.
    • Do not use the phone when refueling
    with gasoline. Gasoline fuels are
    highly explosive.
    Only fuel from well-known oil companies
    should be used.
    All Saab gasoline engines can be driven on
    fuel of grade AON 87-93.
    For optimum performance we recommend:
    • AON 90 for 2.0 Turbo 185 hp.
    • AON 93 for 2.0 Turbo 205 hp and
    2.3 Turbo Viggen.
    If fuel containing a mixture of alcohol is
    used, the following restrictions apply:
    Methanol: max. 5% by volume.
    Ethanol: max. 10% by volume.
    MTBE: max. 15% by volume.

    151

    The fuel filler cap is located in the right rear
    quarter panel.
    Switch off engine.
    Insert the fuel-pump nozzle beyond the
    flange on the filler pipe. Do not withdraw the
    nozzle while filling is in progress.
    Cease refueling the first time the pump
    stops.

    NOTE
    Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right
    up the filler pipe as expansion room is
    needed.
    Fuel-tank capacity: 17.0 US gal. (64 liters)
    Screw on the filler cap and keep turning until
    it has clicked at least three times to prevent
    illumination of the CHECK ENGINE light
    and a TIGHTEN FUEL FILLER CAP message to appear on SID.
    Manually opening the fuel filler door, see
    page 144, Convertible, page 58.
    The most effective way to prevent condensation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
    possible running problems) is to keep the
    tank full.
    Before the onset of freezing temperatures in
    winter, it may be advisable to add gasoline
    anti-freeze to the fuel a few times to dispel
    any condensation in the system.



  • Page 152

    152

    Starting and driving
    Recommended fuel:
    For optimum performance we recommend:

    IB1891

    • AON 90 for 2.0 Turbo 185 hp engines.
    • AON 93 for 2.0 Turbo 205 hp engines and
    2.3 Viggen.
    Octane rating is determined according to
    the formula:

    NOTE
    • Fill to maximum filling capacity
    • Stop filling after the first time that the
    nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel
    • Filling capacity can differ between
    different fuel stations and outside
    temperature. Fuel tank volume when
    nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
    0.5 gal. (2 liters).
    • Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
    pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
    room for expansion especially during
    hot weather.

    MON + RON
    2
    where MON is the Motor Octane Number,
    and RON is the Research Octane Number.
    The average of these two values is the
    octane rating of the gasoline as it appears
    on the pump at a retail gas station. This
    value is sometimes referred to as the
    "Anti-Knock Index" (AKI) or the "Average
    Octane Number" (AON).

    To avoid deposit formation on the fuel injectors which can cause poor driveability, use
    only quality gasolines that contain detergents and corrosion inhibitors. Because
    gasolines sold at retail gas stations vary in
    their composition and quality, you should
    switch to a different brand if you begin experiencing driveability and/or hard starting
    problems shortly after refueling your car. In
    recent years, a variety of fuel additives and
    alcohols or oxygenates have been blended
    with gasoline. These types of gasolines may
    be found in all parts of the United States and
    Canada, but particularly in geographic
    areas and cities that have high carbon monoxide levels. Saab approves the use of such
    "reformulated" gasolines in its products,
    which help in reducing pollution from all
    motor vehicles, provided that the following
    blending percentages are met by such
    fuels:
    • Up to 10% ethanol by volume, with corrosion inhibitors.
    • Up to 15% MTBE by volume (methyl tertiary butyl ether).
    • Up to 5% methanol by volume, with an
    equal amount of a suitable co-solvent and
    added corrosion inhibitors.



  • Page 153

    Starting and driving
    Other, less common, fuel additives used by
    some gasoline dealers are also acceptable,
    provided that the resultant gasoline is not
    more than 2.7% oxygen by weight. In many
    cases, you may not be able to determine the
    exact type or percentage by volume of fuel
    additive in the gasoline you purchase for
    your car.
    Some Canadian and U.S. gasolines contain
    an octane enhancing additive called methlycyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
    (MMT). If such fuel is used, your emission
    control system performance may deteriorate and the malfunction indicator lamp on
    your instrument panel may turn on. If this
    occurs, return to your authorized Saab
    dealer for service.
    However, these blended gasolines are regulated and should never exceed these recommended blend percentages and service
    station operators should know if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates,
    and have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions. Nevertheless, if you begin to
    notice a problem with the way your car starts
    or runs shortly after it has been refueled, try
    a different brand of gasoline.

    153

    NOTE

    NOTE

    Higher concentrations of methanol than
    listed above, or the use of methanolblended gasoline without suitable
    co-solvents and corrosion inhibitors,
    can damage your car’s fuel system,
    leading to the need for repairs which are
    not covered by Saab’s product warranty.

    The engine control module (ECM) monitoring the engine parameters also
    stores fault codes.
    Under certain circumstances, this may
    cause constant illumination of the
    Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)
    lamp
    , thus indicating a fault that
    must be checked by your Saab dealer,
    see page 63.
    NOTE: always observe the following two
    measures:
    • Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
    screwed on correctly before the
    engine is started. Screw on the fuel
    filler cap until you hear three distinct
    clicks.
    • Avoid driving with the fuel low level
    indicator illuminated. The symbol
    illuminates when less than approximately 2.5 gallons (10 litres) of fuel
    remains in the tank.



  • Page 154

    154

    Starting and driving

    Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
    Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87
    octane or higher. It is recommended that the
    gasoline meet specifications which were
    developed by the American Automobile
    Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and
    endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle
    Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection.
    Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification
    could provide improved driveability and
    emission control system performance compared to other gasolines.

    In Canada, look for the
    "Auto Makers’ Choice" label
    on the fuel pump.

    Canada Only
    Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If
    the octane is less than 87, you may get a
    heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s
    bad enough, it can damage your engine. If
    you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or
    higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
    engine needs service. But don’t worry if you
    hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
    and you don’t have to buy a higher octane
    fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem.
    If your vehicle is certified to meet California
    Emission Standards (indicated on the
    underhood emission control label), it is
    designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If such fuels are not
    available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
    satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction
    indicator lamp on your instrument panel
    may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a
    smog-check test. See "Malfunction Indicator Lamp" in the Index. If this occurs, return
    to your authorized Saab dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the
    event it is determined that the cause of the
    condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
    may not be covered by your warranty.

    Some gasolines that are not reformulated
    for low emissions may contain an
    octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
    (MMT); ask your service station operator
    whether or not the fuel contains MMT. Saab
    does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used,
    spark plug life may be reduced and your
    emission control system performance may
    be affected. The Engine malfunction
    (CHECK ENGINE) light on your instrument
    panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to
    your authorized Saab dealer for service.



  • Page 155

    Engine Break-in Period

    Manual transmission

    Pistons, cylinder bores and bearings need
    time to obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces.
    If a new engine is driven too hard, this gradual process of bedding-in will not be possible and the life of the engine will be shortened.
    During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), do
    not exceed 5,000 rpm.
    In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
    throttle, other than for brief instances,
    during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).

    To start the engine the clutch pedal must
    be fully depressed.
    The gear positions are marked on the gear
    lever. Before reverse (R) can be engaged,
    you must lift the ring underneath the
    gear-lever knob.
    To change gear, fully depress the clutch
    pedal and then release it smoothly. It is
    inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
    on the gear lever, as this can increase the
    wear on the gearbox.
    When shifting down from 5th to 4th gear,
    ease the gear lever straight back, without
    applying any lateral pressure. This will prevent 2nd gear being engaged by mistake,
    which can result in overreving and possible
    damage to the engine.

    Wearing in new brake pads
    New brake pads take time to bed in, about
    90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
    under stop-and-go conditions or about
    300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
    To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
    hard braking as much as possible.

    NOTE
    When the reverse gear is to be engaged
    the car must be at a standstill with the
    accelerator fully released. Lift the reverse
    lock-out collar and push the gear lever
    firmly to the right in neutral before easing
    it into reverse.

    155

    IB864

    Starting and driving

    Shift-up indicator for improved fuel
    economy
    (U.S. models only except Viggen)
    Cars equipped with a manual transmission
    have a "Shift-up" light on the instrument
    panel. The light begins to work after the
    vehicle is warmed up and provides you with
    a good indication when to shift to a higher
    gear.
    It is not necessary or recommended to
    follow the shift-up recommendations in all
    driving conditions, for example, when driving in heavy urban traffic or steep downhill
    grades.
    However, shifting with the light should result
    in improved fuel economy. Therefore, for
    reduced fuel consumption and better
    energy conservation, you should make a
    habit of shifting before or when the shift-up
    light comes on.



  • Page 156

    156

    Starting and driving

    Automatic transmission

    When the car is stationary, the engine must
    be idling when the selector lever is moved.
    You must have your foot on the brake
    pedal to move the lever out of park.
    If the accelerator is depressed while the
    lever is moved, this will result in abnormal
    wear in the transmission.

    WARNING
    • Make it a habit to keep your foot on the
    brake when selecting a drive position,
    to prevent the car from creeping forward (or backwards if reverse is
    selected).

    • Never park the car with the selector
    lever in a drive position, even if the
    parking brake is on.
    • If you want to leave the car with the
    engine running, move the selector
    lever to P or N and apply the parking
    brake.

    IB865

    • The car must be at a standstill before
    P, R or N is selected. You have to have
    your foot on the brake pedal to move
    the lever out of park. If the car is still
    moving when a drive position is subsequently selected, this could cause a
    crash or damage the automatic transmission.

    NOTE

    Selector lever
    1 Catch
    2 Button for SPORT position
    3 Button for WINTER position

    The electronic control module for the automatic transmission receives information on
    engine torque and road speed. It also controls the hydraulic pressure in the transmission to ensure that gear changing is as
    smooth as possible.
    The position of the selector lever is shown
    by the symbols adjacent to the lever and
    also by an indicator on the main instrument
    panel.
    The ignition key can only be removed when
    the selector lever is in the P position.

    After selecting a drive position, pause
    briefly to allow the gear to engage (the car
    starts to pull a little) before you accelerate.



  • Page 157

    Starting and driving

    Indication of gear position on the main
    instrument panel
    The detent button on the selector lever has
    to be pressed before the selector can be
    moved between certain positions.
    Three modes for the automatic transmission can be selected: Normal, Sport and
    Winter.
    The Normal mode, which provides the best
    fuel economy, is the default setting when
    the engine is started.
    Sport mode alters the angle of the throttle
    valve for increased power compared to the
    same accelerator position in Normal mode.
    This means gear changes are made to optimize the car’s performance. The SPORT
    indicator light is shown on the main instrument panel; see page 162).

    Adaptive gear change pattern is a function of the Normal and Sport modes. It
    allows gear changing to be suited to the prevailing driving conditions. The transmission
    control module senses the engine load and
    temperature of the transmission and selects
    one of the four available gear change patterns. Unnecessary gear changes and
    undesired temperature increases in the
    transmission are avoided.

    R N D 3 2
    1

    IB866

    IB1280

    P

    157

    Detent positions for selector movement
    The Winter mode is intended for use when
    pulling away and driving on icy roads. In this
    mode, the transmission starts in 3rd gear, to
    provide better grip, and the WINTER indicator appears on the main instrument panel.
    When the ignition is turned to OFF, the automatic transmission will automatically revert
    to Normal mode (see page 162).



  • Page 158

    Starting and driving

    Lock-up function

    Park Brake Shift Lock

    The automatic transmission has a lock-up
    function, which renders the torque converter inoperative in 3rd and 4th gears. The
    result is reduction in the engine speed and,
    hence, fuel consumption.
    When the lock-up function comes into operation, it may give the impression of an overdrive being engaged.

    The transmission has a safety function
    called Park Brake Shift Lock. For the selector lever to be moved out of the P position,
    the brake pedal must be depressed at the
    same time as the detent button is lifted.
    Park Brake Shift Lock override

    Kick-down
    When the accelerator is pressed down hard,
    a downshift to the next lower gear will occur
    to provide maximum acceleration, e.g. for
    overtaking.
    The change-up to the next gear again will
    take place either when the accelerator is
    released or when maximum engine speed
    for that gear is reached.

    NOTE
    If a problem arises with the shift lock
    mechanism, it may not be possible to
    move the selector out of the park position,
    even if the ignition is ON. If for some
    reason the selector has to be moved out
    of the park position (i.e. to tow the car a
    short distance) do as described below.
    1 Apply the parking brake.
    2 Make sure the key is in the ON position.
    3 Use a small tool such as a screwdriver
    and push the lever downwards so that
    the detent button can be pressed
    approx. 10 mm.
    4 Move the selector out of position P to N.
    5 Remove the tool.
    6 Release the parking brake if the car is to
    be moved immediately; otherwise keep
    it applied.

    IB947

    158

    Check fuse No. 12 (see page 208). If the
    fuse is OK, check the battery voltage.
    If the problem was cured by changing the
    fuse or battery, you do not have to contact a
    Saab dealer.
    If the fuse blows again as soon as the Shift
    Lock feature is activated you should contact
    your Saab dealer.



  • Page 159

    Starting and driving
    Automatic transmission
    fault indicator
    If the symbol appears on the main instrument panel, the system has detected a fault
    in the automatic transmission or its control
    module (see page 64).
    This also means that the Limp-home mode
    has been selected, to guard against further
    damage being done to the transmission. In
    this mode, the automatic transmission
    starts in 4th gear, and gear changes (if necessary) will have to be made manually.
    It is not possible to select the SPORT or
    WINTER mode when the Limp-home mode
    is active.
    You should have the automatic transmission checked as soon as possible by an
    authorized Saab dealer.
    The following gears will be engaged in the
    respective selector positions when the automatic transmission is in the Limp-home
    mode:
    Position R
    Gear

    D

    Reverse 4th

    3

    2

    1

    4th

    3rd

    3rd

    NOTE
    If the control module has actuated the
    Limp-home function for the automatic
    transmission, the car will remain in 4th
    gear when D and 3 are selected, making
    it very sluggish. To overcome this, move
    the selector lever to position 1. The transmission then starts in 3rd gear. When the
    car is moving you can select position D
    or 3.

    Overheated transmission oil
    If the transmission oil becomes overheated
    while driving, the following message
    appears on the SID: TRANSMISSION
    OVERHEATING. In this event, stop the car
    in a suitable place, switch off the engine,
    open the hood and wait until the message
    goes out. When driving subsequent to the
    transmission oil overheating, select either
    3rd gear or Drive, whichever will allow the
    engine to run at 3,000 rpm and maintain the
    speed of traffic or a safe speed.
    The transmission oil can become very hot
    when the car is driven with a heavy load; for
    example, driving with a trailer on hilly roads
    when the wrong gear has been selected,
    resulting in many extra gear changes.
    Select one of the positions 1, 2 or 3. A high
    outside temperature or a defective oil cooler
    can also cause the oil temperature to
    increase. Contact an authorized Saab
    dealer, see also page 173.

    159

    Driving in hilly country with a heavy
    load
    Overheating of the automatic-transmission
    fluid can occur when the car is towing a
    heavy load, such as a trailer in hilly country,
    with the wrong gear selected, resulting in
    abnormally frequent gear changing. To
    avoid the transmission oil from overheating
    always drive in Normal mode, then the
    adaptive gear change pattern is active.
    High ambient temperatures can also
    increase the temperature of the transmission fluid or the oil cooler may be faulty. As
    the transmission fluid temperature
    increases, its useful service life is reduced.
    Contact an authorized Saab dealer (see
    also page 173).

    WARNING
    Remember to use engine-braking (selector position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes
    when you are driving on a long or steep
    downhill slope.
    Brake failure can result from overheated
    brakes!

    Towing
    Towing a car with automatic transmission,
    see page 181.



  • Page 160

    160

    Starting and driving

    Selector positions
    P
    To shift out of the P position you must depress
    the brake pedal and the ignition must be OFF.
    The parking position (P) must only be selected
    when the car is at a complete standstill. The selector lever is locked and the transmission is
    mechanically immobilized. Always apply the parking brake after parking the car.
    The engine can be started.
    R
    The reverse (R) position must only be selected
    when the car is at a complete standstill. The
    detent-release button must be pressed before the
    selector lever can be moved to R. Wait until
    reverse gear has engaged (car starts to creep)
    before touching the accelerator.
    N
    In the Neutral position (N), the transmission is disengaged from the engine. The engine can be
    started, but first ensure that the parking brake is
    on, to prevent the car from moving off unexpectedly.
    To prevent the engine and transmission from
    becoming hotter than necessary, select N for
    stops other than brief ones, e.g. if stuck in a traffic
    jam.
    The normal drive position (D) is recommended for
    waiting at traffic lights.

    D
    The Drive position (D) is the position for normal
    motoring. Gear changes between 1st and 4th will
    take place automatically, the timing of which is
    determined by the throttle (accelerator) position
    and the speed of the car.
    After moving the selector lever to D, pause to give
    the gear time to engage (car starts to pull).
    3
    In position 3, 4th gear is locked out. The car will
    start in 1st gear and normal gear changing (up
    and down) will take place automatically between
    gears 1, 2 and 3.
    Moving the selector lever from D to 3 will cause a
    downshift to 3rd gear, which will give better
    engine-braking.
    Do not move the selector to position 3 at speeds
    in excess of 90 mph (150 km/h).
    2
    Position 2 is recommended in hilly country as it
    provides effective engine-braking. Normal gear
    changing (up and down) between 1st and 2nd
    gear will take place automatically. Third and 4th
    gears are locked out.
    Do not move the selector to position 2 at speeds
    in excess of 70 mph (110 km/h).
    1
    Position 1 should be used when maximum
    engine-braking is required on steep downhill
    slopes.
    Do not move the selector to position 1 at speeds
    in excess of 30 mph (50 km/h).



  • Page 161

    Starting and driving
    If the gear selector lever is moved from position D to 1, a
    change-down to 3rd gear will occur at about 110 mph (180 km/h).
    A change-down to 2nd gear will occur at about 75 mph (120 km/h)
    and to 1st gear at about 40 mph (65 km/h).
    When position 1 is selected, all the other gears will be locked out.
    Manual gear-changing is not recommended on slippery roads.
    If one of the drive wheels spins excessively, the engine torque will
    be reduced to avoid damaging the transmission.

    NOTE
    • Do not move the selector to position 3 at speeds in excess of
    90 mph (150 km/h).
    • Do not move the selector to position 2 at speeds in excess of
    70 mph (110 km/h).

    161

    Adaptive gear-change patterns
    Adaptive gear-change patterns are selected automatically depending on the engine load. This function applies in the Normal and Sport
    modes.
    The change occurs at a higher rotation speed and the gear remains
    engaged for a longer period, if the control module senses that the
    load does not drop. These change patterns avoid unnecessary gear
    changes when, for example, driving on long inclines with a trailer,
    and to prevent overheating of the transmission oil. This function cuts
    in automatically if the oil becomes too hot, to protect the transmission from damage, and lowers the oil temperature.
    The adaptive change pattern function is not activated at speeds over
    93 mph (150 km/h). If a pattern is in operation when this speed is
    exceeded, it will be maintained until the control module senses that
    a more suitable one can be activated.
    The adaptive gear-change pattern function is deselected when:
    • Winter mode is selected.
    • The engine is switched off.
    • The load is reduced by so much that this function is no longer
    required.


    “Automatic transmission fault indicator” appears on the
    main instrument panel, see page 159.



  • Page 162

    162

    Starting and driving

    The SPORT and WINTER modes
    To select Sport mode, press the ”S” button on the
    selector lever when the selector lever is in position
    N, D, 3, 2 or 1.
    In this mode, gear changes will take place at
    higher engine speeds than in Normal mode, in
    other words, the transmission will shift up later
    and shift down earlier for the same throttle (accelerator) position.
    The Sport mode will be deselected if:





    The S button is pressed.
    The selector lever is moved to position P or R.
    The engine is switched off.
    The Winter mode is selected.



    “Automatic transmission fault indicator”
    appears on main instrument panel, see page
    159.

    To select Winter mode, press the “W“ button. The
    Winter mode facilitates starting off and driving on
    icy roads. Third gear is selected automatically for
    starting off to reduce wheelspin.
    Winter mode can be selected when the engine is
    running by pressing the ”W” button on the selector-lever surround. It cannot be selected when the
    selector lever is in position 2 or 1.
    Note: It is still possible to use kick-down in the
    Winter mode, in which case a change-down to
    2nd or 1st will take place.
    The Winter mode will be deselected if:





    The W button is pressed.
    The engine is switched off.
    The selector lever is moved to position 2 or 1.
    The automatic-transmission fluid overheats.



    “Automatic transmission fault indicator”
    appears on main instrument panel, see page
    159.



  • Page 163

    Starting and driving

    Cruise Control

    Temporary increase in speed
    Press the accelerator to override the preset
    speed, e.g. for overtaking.
    When you release the accelerator, the
    system will revert to the preset speed.

    WARNING
    • Do not use the Cruise-control system
    on wet or icy roads, in dense traffic or
    on winding roads

    To cancel temporarily

    • OFF (system is disconnected; the system
    is always in the OFF position when the
    engine is started).
    • ON (system switched on).
    • SET/+ (to set the desired speed).
    • CANCEL (cancel operation of system,
    e.g. to reduce speed temporarily).
    • RESUME/– (resume preset speed).
    When the system is ON, the CRUISE indicator light will appear on the main instrument panel and will be extinguished when
    the system is switched OFF. If CANCEL is
    selected, CRUISE will flash off once.

    IB1593

    • To prevent the system being activated
    inadvertently, set the control to OFF
    when you do not want to use the
    system
    For safety reasons (brake system function) the brakes must be applied once,
    when the engine has started, before the
    cruise control system can be activated.
    The system is operated by means of the
    controls on the stalk switch:

    163

    To set the desired speed

    Move the control stalk to CANCEL
    (spring-loaded position before OFF position). This will disengage the system but the
    preset speed will be retained in the system
    memory. (The memory is deleted when the
    engine is switched off.)

    To re-engage the system

    Move the switch to ON. Accelerate to the
    desired speed (minimum speed: 25 mph
    (40 km/h) and press SET/+.

    To revert to the preset speed, slide the
    switch to RESUME/–. This will only operate
    when the car’s speed is above 25 mph
    (40 km/h).

    To increase the preset speed

    To reduce the preset speed

    Accelerate to the desired speed and press
    SET/+.
    You can also increase the speed of the car
    using the SET/+ button. Press it once to
    increase the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or
    hold it in and release when the desired
    speed is reached.

    The cruise-control system will always disengage automatically the moment that either
    the brake pedal or the clutch pedal is
    depressed.
    It is also possible to reduce the speed by:
    • Sliding the button to RESUME/– once will
    reduce the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
    • Holding the button in the RESUME/–
    position will effect a gradual reduction in
    speed until the button is released.



  • Page 164

    164

    Starting and driving

    Disengaging the system
    The system will be disengaged:
    • When the brake or clutch pedal is
    depressed.
    • When the switch is moved to CANCEL.
    • When the switch is moved to OFF.
    • When the engine is switched off.
    • When the selector lever is moved to position N (cars with automatic transmission).

    Braking
    To avoid overheating the brakes, (e.g. when
    negotiating long descents with a drop of
    several hundred feet), select a low gear to
    use the braking effect of the engine. If the
    car has automatic transmission, move the
    selector lever to position 1 or 2.
    When driving fast, you can help to prolong
    the life of the brakes by thinking ahead and
    braking harder for short periods, rather than
    braking more moderately over long
    stretches.

    Brake pad wear indicators
    The outboard brake pads on the front
    wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
    When the lining is down to 3 mm, the pad
    will produce a screeching, squealing or
    scraping noise when the brakes are applied.
    New pads should be installed without delay.
    Brake pads should only be replaced by
    an authorized Saab dealer.
    To ensure optimum brake performance,
    it is recommended that you use only
    Saab original brake pads.

    WARNING
    • It is prudent to try your brakes from
    time to time, especially when driving in
    heavy rain, through water collected on
    the road, in snow, on a wet road surface or in salty slush. In such conditions, the brakes may take longer than
    normal to take effect. To rectify this,
    touch the brake pedal periodically to
    dry the brakes out.
    • The same applies after the car has
    been washed or when the weather is
    very humid.
    • Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
    Before parking, and if the traffic conditions allow, brake quite heavily so that
    the brake discs and pads warm up and
    dry.
    • The brakes are power assisted and it
    should be kept in mind that the servo
    unit only provides the power assistance when the engine is running.
    • The brake pressure required when the
    engine is off,( e.g. when the car is
    being towed) is roughly four times the
    normal pedal force required. The
    pedal also feels hard and unresponsive.



  • Page 165

    Starting and driving

    165

    ABS brakes

    ABS (Antilock Braking System) modulates
    the brake pressure to the respective
    wheels. Wheel sensors detect if a wheel is
    about to lock, and the control module
    reduces the pressure to that wheel and then
    increases it once more until the tendency is
    detected again.
    The brake system is equipped with an Electronic Brake-force Distribution device
    (EBD), which distributes the brake pressure
    between the front and rear wheels in such a
    way as to achieve optimum braking performance irrespective of the car’s speed
    and load.
    The ABS system has a built-in diagnostic
    function which will switch on the ABS warning light if a fault is detected in the system
    (see page 62).

    ABS braking - confirmation that the system is operating
    The ABS system will not reduce the braking
    distance on loose gravel or on snow or ice
    but, because the wheels cannot lock up,
    some steering control is retained.
    When the ABS system is working, i.e. modulation of the brake pressure is in progress,
    the brake pedal will pulsate and a ticking
    noise will be heard. All this is perfectly normal.
    Press the pedal down hard (you cannot
    press too hard) and steer the car to safety.

    IB878

    • The additional safety afforded by the
    ABS system is not designed to allow
    drivers to drive faster but to make
    normal driving safer.
    • To stop as quickly as possible, without
    loss of directional stability, whether
    the road surface is dry, wet or slippery,
    press the brake pedal down hard
    without letting up (do not pump the
    pedal), declutching simultaneously, and steer the car to safety.

    IB877

    WARNING

    Braking with ABS - evasive steering

    Do not release the brake pedal before the
    car has come to a halt or the danger is
    past!
    This is critical.
    If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
    operate even when only light pressure is
    applied to the pedal. This means that you
    can brake gently to test the condition of the
    road and adapt your driving accordingly.
    It is well worth practising the use of ABS
    brakes on a skid pad or other suitable facility.



  • Page 166

    166

    Starting and driving

    Traction Control System
    How the system works
    The traction control system (TCS) is
    designed to minimize wheelspin. This
    enables the car to achieve the best possible
    grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
    together with greater stability.
    The TCS system uses information from the
    ABS system’s wheel sensors to detect
    when the front (driving) wheels are rotating
    faster then the rear wheels. It then monitors
    whether one driving wheel is rotating faster
    than the other. If so, the faster wheel is
    retarded until both wheels are rotating at the
    same speed.
    If the two front wheels are rotating at the
    same speed but are turning faster than the
    rear wheels, the torque from the engine is
    reduced to eliminate the difference.
    The process continues until all the wheels
    are rotating at the same speed.

    The advantages of the TCS system become
    most apparent when the cohesion between
    the front wheels and the road surface is so
    low that one or both of the wheels would
    lose their grip were the car not equipped
    with the TCS, e.g.:
    • When the car is pulling away or accelerating with the front wheels on different surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry). The
    TCS then functions like an electronic differential lock.
    • When the car is pulling away or accelerating on a slippery road, in which case the
    TCS eliminates wheelspin. The same
    applies when the car is reversing.
    • On cornering, if there is a tendency for the
    inner front wheel to rotate faster than the
    other wheels.
    • On overtaking.

    WARNING
    When driving normally, the TCS helps to
    imrove the safety of the car. This does
    not mean that car can be driven faster.
    The same care and prudence normally
    applied should be displayed on cornering and when driving on slippery roads.

    TCS OFF
    The
    indicator on the main instrument
    panel will come on:
    • If a fault has been detected and the
    system has therefore been switched off.
    • If there is a fault in the ABS system.
    • If the system has been switched off manually.
    The indicator light will also come on for
    4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to
    ON, while an internal system check is performed.

    TCS indicator
    The
    in the tachometer comes on when
    the system is operative, i.e. when the
    wheels are not rotating at the same speed.
    The fact that the TCS system is operative
    indicates that the limit for grip has been
    exceeded and that the driver must exert
    greater care.



  • Page 167

    Starting and driving
    The
    is switched on automatically when
    the engine is started.
    The system can be switched off manually by
    the TCS button, whereupon
    on the
    main instrument panel will come on. The
    TCS system cannot be switched off if the car
    is travelling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).
    It may be necessary to switch off the system
    if the car has become bogged down, for
    instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
    If a fault is detected in the ABS system, the
    TCS will be switched off automatically.
    The cruise-control system will automatically
    be disengaged after one second if it is active
    when the TCS starts to operate.

    IB1539

    Turning the TCS off

    167



  • Page 168

    168

    Starting and driving

    Parking
    WARNING

    Parking brake
    The parking brake lever is located between
    the front seats. The brake acts on the rear
    wheels. When the parking brake is on, the
    indicator lamp on the main instrument panel
    will be lit.
    To release the brake, lift the lever slightly,
    press the pawl button, and let the lever
    down.

    WARNING
    • Always apply the parking brake when
    the car is parked.
    • Always apply the parking brake
    before removing the ignition key.
    • Never use the parking brake while the
    car is moving.

    • Park where the vehicle will not create
    an obstruction or a hazard to other
    road users.
    • Do not park on dry grass or other combustible material. The catalytic converter gets very hot and could start a
    fire.
    • Apply the parking brake.
    • Shift into Reverse for manual transmission; for automatic transmission:
    move selector lever to P (Park)), and
    remove the ignition key. Lock the car.

    IB1269

    IB982

    • Do not leave children or pets unattended in the car. In warm, sunny
    weather, the temperature inside the
    car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).

    NOTE
    Saab 9-3 Viggen: The body design
    together with the relatively low ground
    clearance of the car means that great
    care must be taken during parking to
    avoid damage to the under part of the
    bumper.



  • Page 169

    IB879

    Starting and driving

    1 Pointing downhill and
    against the curb
    – Turn the wheels into the
    curb and edge the car forward until the wheels touch
    the curb.

    2 Pointing uphill and
    against the curb
    – Turn the wheels away
    from the curb and edge the
    car back until the wheels
    touch the curb.

    3 Pointing uphill or downhill – no curb
    – Turn the wheels towards
    the edge of the road. If the
    car should start rolling, it
    will not run into the road.

    Parking on a hill

    Long-term parking

    When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
    wheels so that they will be blocked by the
    curb if the car should move.

    If the car is not going to be used for some
    time, e.g. 3–4 months, the following steps
    are recommended:
    • Run the engine to normal temperature
    before long-term parking.
    • Drain the washer-fluid reservoir and
    hoses.

    169

    • Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
    seals on the hood, trunk lid and doors,
    and lubricate them with glycerol (glycerin).
    • After washing the car, dry the brake discs
    by taking the car out on the road and
    applying the brakes a few times. If the traffic conditions allow, brake quite heavily
    just before parking.
    • Fill the fuel tank with fuel to prevent condensation forming in it.
    • Top up the coolant and check the antifreeze before the onset of winter.
    • Park the car in a dry, covered and
    well-ventilated building. Leave the parking brake OFF!
    • Disconnect the negative (-) battery lead.
    If freezing temperatures are likely to occur
    during the long-term parking, remove the
    battery and store it away from freezing
    temperatures.
    • Ideally, the car should be put up on
    blocks, with the wheels off the ground. If
    this is not possible, inflate the tires to
    about 43 psi (300 kPa).
    • Leave all the windows open a crack and
    cover the car with a fabric tarpaulin - not
    one made of plastic which will not breath.



  • Page 170

    170

    Starting and driving

    Economical motoring

    the engine has started from cold. Thus, if the
    car is mainly used for short journeys of
    3–5 miles (5–8 km), the fuel consumption
    will be 60–80 % higher than normal.

    Factors affecting fuel consumption
    Fuel consumption is greatly affected by the
    general driving conditions, the way in which
    the car is driven and at what speeds, the
    weather, the state of the road, the condition
    of the car, etc.

    Driving technique

    Breaking-in

    Weather conditions
    Fuel consumption can be as much as 10 %
    lower in summer than in winter. The higher
    consumption in cold weather is explained by
    the longer time it takes for the engine to
    reach normal operating temperature, and
    for the transmission and wheel bearings to
    warm up. Fuel economy is also affected by
    the distance driven: short journeys of
    3-5 miles (5-8 km) do not give the engine
    enough time to reach normal temperature.
    Strong winds can also affect fuel consumption.

    WARNING
    Never switch the engine off while driving
    as the effect of the brakes and power
    steering will be greatly reduced.

    IB311

    Fuel consumption may be somewhat higher
    during the break-in period (the first 3,000–
    4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km).

    Percentage increase in fuel consumption
    of engine starting from cold compared to
    engine at normal temperature
    How to read the graph:
    If fuel consumption with the engine at
    normal temperature is 28 mpg
    (10l/100 km), the actual fuel consumption 3
    miles (5 km) after the engine has started
    from cold will be:
    – 23.5 mpg (12l/100 km) at outside temp.
    of 68°F (20°C) (increase of 20%)
    – 17.7 mpg (16l/100 km) at outside temp.
    of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%)
    – 14 mpg (20l/100 km)) at outside temp. of
    –4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%)
    As can be seen, both the distance travelled
    by the car and the outside temperature have
    a major impact on fuel consumption after

    • To obtain the best running economy, not
    only regarding fuel consumption but general wear also, regular service is required.
    • High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
    heavy braking and much low gear work all
    gives rise to higher fuel consumption.
    • Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
    in cold weather, the use of studded tires
    and roof racks, and towing a trailer all
    increase fuel consumption.
    • Do not run the engine when the car is stationary.
    If idling, it will take much longer before the
    engine becomes hot. Engine wear is
    greatest during this warming-up phase.
    Therefore drive away as soon as possible
    after the engine is started and avoid high
    revving.



  • Page 171

    Starting and driving
    • Driving in a low gear results in higher fuel
    consumption than in a high gear because
    of the lower engine speed for a given road
    speed. Always change up to a higher gear
    as soon as traffic conditions allow and use
    the highest gear as much as possible.
    • Check the air pressure in the tires once a
    month. Incorrect pressures increase tire
    wear. It is better to have slightly higher
    pressure than lower.
    • Check fuel consumption regularly.
    Increased consumption can indicate that
    something is wrong and that the car
    needs to be checked by an authorized
    Saab dealer.
    Practical tests on the roads have demonstrated that substantial savings in fuel consumption can be made if the above advice
    is heeded.

    Road conditions
    Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do
    unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
    (the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
    less than the additional amount required to
    climb the hill).

    Engine block heater (standard
    equipment in Canada, accessory in
    U.S.)
    The following are just some of the benefits
    to the car and the environment of using an
    engine block heater:





    Lower fuel consumption.
    Reduced wear on the engine.
    Inside of car warms up faster.
    Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
    over short runs.
    The engine block heater is effective with
    outside temperatures up to +60 – +70°F
    (+15 – +20°C). The warmer it is outside, the
    shorter the time the heater need be connected. Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.
    If the car is equipped with a removable electrical cabin heater that is not in use, this
    should be stored in the luggage compartment.

    171

    Driving in cold weather
    Before starting a journey in cold weather
    you should check the following:
    • That the wiper blades have not become
    frozen to the windshield/glass.
    • Brush any snow away from the air intake
    for the heater system (opening between
    hood and windshield).
    • It may be advisable to lubricate the
    door-lock cylinder (use molybdenum
    disulphide, MoS2) to prevent its freezing.
    If the lock has frozen, take care not to
    break the key (or use the remote control)
    – heat it first or spray it with de-icer.
    • Periodically during the winter, add gasoline anti-freeze to the fuel to dispel any
    condensation in the fuel tank which could
    freeze and cause problems in the system.
    Keep the tank well filled to reduce the risk
    of condensation forming.
    If the car is parked outside in freezing
    weather, fuel additives (gasoline
    anti-freeze) will not do any good as it
    cannot remove water that has already frozen. Park the car in a warm place so that
    any ice that may have built up melts, then
    add gasoline anti-freeze when filling up
    the tank. Condensation is caused by
    changes in the outdoor temperature or by
    the car being parked alternately in a
    garage and outside.
    • It is particularly important when the roads
    are slippery that the brakes and tires be in
    good condition.



  • Page 172

    172

    Starting and driving

    • Check the anti-freeze in the engine coolant, see page 192.
    The car´s trip computer will warn you when
    there is a risk of slippery conditions. For further information on this function, see page
    69.
    The car is equipped with tires designed to
    provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
    roads, although this has been achieved at
    the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
    snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
    and ice, we therefore recommend that
    winter (snow) tires be fitted.
    Winter (snow) tires, particularly studded
    tires (where use is legally permitted), generally make driving safer on snow and ice.

    Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions governing the use of different
    types of winter tires and snow chains.
    Studded tires are not allowed in some
    countries.
    If winter tires are installed, the same type
    must be installed on all wheels. Your Saab
    dealer will be pleased to advise you on the
    best tires for your car.
    Remember that tires age. It may therefore
    be necessary to change them before they
    reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually
    lose their friction properties. Date code, see
    page 214.
    The best response if the car gets into a
    front-wheel skid is to freewheel (manual
    gearbox only), i.e. disengage the clutch (so
    that the wheels are neither driven nor
    braked by the engine) and carefully steer
    the wheels in the direction you want to go.
    If the car has an automatic transmission you
    should lift off the accelerator somewhat and
    carefully steer the wheels in the direction
    you want to go.
    In a rear-wheel skid, steer into the skid, i.e.
    in the same direction as that in which the
    back is sliding.

    Tire chains
    If you want to fit tire chains (where legally
    permitted) they should only be installed to
    the tires recommended under ”Technical
    data” (see page 242).
    Consult your Saab dealer for details about
    approved tire chains.

    WARNING
    • Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h)
    when tire chains are fitted.
    • Tire chains can reduce the directional
    stability of the car.
    • Tire chains must not be used on the
    rear wheels.

    NOTE
    • Check the links frequently for wear.
    • Check that the chains do not contact
    the wheel-arch liner at full lock.
    • See section "Technical data", page
    242, for information on allowable
    wheel dimensions for the fitting of tire
    chains.



  • Page 173

    Starting and driving

    Driving in hot weather
    • Always check the coolant level before
    starting a journey. When the engine is
    cold, the coolant must not be above the
    KALT/COLD mark on the expansion tank.
    • At the end of a journey, if the engine has
    worked hard, allow it to idle for two or
    three minutes before switching it off.
    If the needle on the temperature gauge
    enters the red zone:
    1 Bring the car to a standstill but leave the
    engine running. Do not remove the cap
    on the expansion tank even if the tank is
    empty. The engine temperature should
    decrease. If the temperature continues
    to rise with the engine idling, the engine
    must be switched off.

    2 If the engine is idling and the needle on
    the temperature gauge falls, wait until a
    normal temperature is shown (about in
    the middle of the scale) before switching
    off the engine. If the coolant needs topping up, unscrew the cap on expansion
    tank carefully.
    Top up, as necessary, ideally with a
    50/50 mixture of coolant and water. Use
    a Saab-approved coolant. If only water
    is available, use that, but remember to
    have the coolant mixture checked as
    soon as possible.

    WARNING
    Always undo the expansion tank filler cap
    carefully, releasing the pressure and any
    vapor before removing the cap completely.
    3 As soon as possible, have the cooling
    system checked by an authorized Saab
    dealer.

    173

    Towing a trailer
    Trailer hitch attachment
    Trailer hitch attachments are available as
    accessories. These are designed for a maximum trailer weight of 3500 lbs (1588 kg),
    with trailer brakes, see also page 236.
    Use only the electrical trailer hitch connector provided in the trailer hitch kit.
    Saab recommends:
    • Use a Saab original hitch kit attachment
    which is designed and tested by Saab.
    • Consult your Saab dealer for the right
    hitch kit for your car.

    NOTE
    Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch and
    wiring, since other wiring methods can
    cause expensive damage to the car’s
    body and electrical system.
    Consult an authorized Saab dealer for
    guidance on how to connect the trailer
    hitch electrical system.



  • Page 174

    174

    Starting and driving

    Maximum recommended trailer weights
    for different gradients

    IB1270

    Trailer weight

    NOTE
    Saab 9-3 Viggen cannot be equipped
    with a trailer hitch because of the design
    of the body and chassis.

    Maximum recommended trailer weights for
    different gradients, for best comfort and
    driveability for manual and automatic cars,
    are shown in the drawing.
    Make sure you are familiar with the law
    regarding speed limits for towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer-braking
    requirements, and also any special
    driving-license provisions
    (see also page 236).

    WARNING
    When towing a trailer, do not attempt to
    negotiate a hill having a gradient in
    excess of 15%. The weight distribution
    over the front wheels of the car will be
    insufficient to prevent wheelspin, making
    further progress impossible.
    In addition, the parking brake may not
    always be able to hold the car and trailer
    securely, with the result that the wheels
    can start to slide downhill.

    IB1691

    The specified trailer weights and gradients
    assume you are operating in hilly terrain and
    therefore apply only to short trips.



  • Page 175

    Starting and driving
    Recommendations for driving in

    hilly terrain
    The following time limits are based on the
    capacity of the cooling system in warm
    weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (30°C).
    Gradient Maximum
    of hill, % trailer
    weight, lbs.
    (kg)
    6-7
    3330 (1500)
    8-9
    3330 (1500)
    10-15
    1890 (850)

    Maximum duration, minutes

    Unlimited
    15 max.
    15 max.

    The following time limits are based on the
    capacity of the cooling system in hot
    weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (40°C).
    Gradient Maximum
    of hill, % trailer
    weight, lbs.
    (kg)
    6-7
    2000 (900)
    8-9
    2000 (900)
    10-15
    1000 (450)

    Maximum duration, minutes

    Unlimited
    15 max.
    15 max.

    It is important to consider the following when
    driving a car with automatic transmission up
    long inclines.
    Use Normal mode when driving with a caravan or trailer on hilly roads. The adaptive
    gear change pattern function will prevent
    the transmission overheating.
    Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
    by the temperature gauge in the main instrument panel.
    The following may also occur:
    • A/C compressor is switched off
    • Gear change pattern is altered
    • The CHECK message TRANSMISSION
    OVERHEATING appears on the SID
    If TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING
    appears on the SID, stop the car as soon as
    it is safe to do so and wait until the message
    has been extinguished. When driving subsequent to the transmission oil overheating,
    select either 3rd gear or Drive, whichever
    will allow the engine to run at 3,000 rpm and
    maintain the speed of traffic or a safe speed;
    see page 159.

    WARNING
    Remember to use engine-braking (selector position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes
    when you are driving on a long or steep
    downhill slope.
    Brake failure can result from overheated
    brakes!

    175

    Do not drive continuously with the WINTER
    mode selected in hilly country when you are
    towing a trailer, as this will increase fuel consumption and risk overheating the transmission.

    Driving considerations
    Always take extra care when towing a
    trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
    and its braking effect reduced. The trailer’s
    braking system and suspension also have a
    considerable effect on these characteristics, see also "Driving with a load" page
    178.
    Select position 1 when descending steep
    hills.

    NOTE
    If the
    “Automatic transmission fault
    indicator” warning comes on, cease
    towing until the problem has been rectified.



  • Page 176

    176

    Starting and driving

    Driving with a roof rack
    load

    Trailer hitch load

    WARNING
    • A roof load will affect the car’s center
    of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
    aware of this when cornering and driving in crosswinds.
    IB880

    The weight distribution on the trailer makes
    a lot of difference to the handling properties
    of the car and trailer combination.With single-axle trailers, whenever possible, concentrate the load over the axle and keep it
    as low as possible.
    The trailer should be loaded so that the
    maximum load on the towbar ball is 5% to
    7% of the trailer weight with a maximum permissible tongue weight of 165 lbs (75 kg).
    Note that this load must be added to the total
    load for the car. If this now exceeds the
    specified load capacity, the load in the trunk
    will have to be reduced by a corresponding
    amount.

    Distribution of load in trailer
    a Light
    b Moderate
    c Heavy

    • Adjust your speed to the prevailing
    conditions.
    • Due to higher aerodynamic drag, fuel
    economy may suffer when driving with
    a roof rack.
    The maximum permissible roof load is
    220 lbs (100 kg). Note that the roof load is
    included in the car’s maximum permissible
    load (see page 235).
    Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed specially for the car are available from your
    Saab dealer. Always secure the roof load
    safely.



  • Page 177

    Starting and driving

    177

    Installing the roof carriers (accessory)

    IB882

    1 Slip the plastic cover onto the adjustable
    foot of the carrier (the foot with a knob for
    tightening) to protect the paintwork
    during assembly.
    2 Open all the doors.
    Fold back the rubber strip and locate the
    fixing holes. On Coupés, the cover
    plates for the rearmost points of attachment must be removed.
    3 Position the carrier gently across the
    roof, with the rigid foot towards you. Hold
    the foot clear of the roof to avoid damaging the paintwork.
    4 Fold back the rubber strip and insert the
    pins of the foot into the fixing holes. In fitting the rear carrier on Coupés, press
    the foot down over the pins in the mounting and slide it forward.
    5 Carefully close the doors on this side, so
    as to hold the feet in place.
    6 Move to the other side of the car and
    remove the plastic cover from the
    adjustable foot. Fold back the rubber
    strip and insert the pins of the foot into
    the fixing holes.
    7 When fitting the rear carrier on Coupés,
    press the foot down over the pins in the
    mounting and slide it forward.
    8 Make the carrier hand-tight by turning
    the knob clockwise.

    IB883

    The carrier feet are marked with a top view
    of the car and an arrow indicating their
    positions.

    Mounting holes for load carrier, front on
    Coupés and front/rear on five-door models

    Carrier mounting, rear, on Coupés



  • Page 178

    178

    Starting and driving

    Driving with a load
    The driving characteristics of the car are
    affected by the way it is loaded.
    • Place heavy loads as far forward and as
    low as possible in the trunk.
    • Secure the load to the tie downs, see
    page 142.
    • The load should be such that the car´s
    total weight or axle weight are not
    exceeded, see page 235.
    • Heavy loads mean that the car’s center of
    gravity is further back. As a result, the car
    will sway more during evasive steering.
    • Never exceed the permissible load in the
    roof box, even if there is room for more.
    • Ensure that the tire pressure is correct –
    slight overinflation is preferable to underinflation.
    • The braking distance of a loaded car is
    always greater. Keep your distance from
    the vehicle in front.
    Tire pressure, see page 211 and back
    cover.

    Tires
    NOTE
    Check the tire pressure at least once a
    month. Underinflation is the main cause
    of:
    • Damage to the wheels.
    • Premature tire wear.
    • Damage to the sidewalls.
    The tire pressure should match the current
    load and speed of the car; see the back
    cover or the tire pressure label on
    page 243.
    The tire pressures given apply to cold tires,
    that is tires that are the same temperature
    as the outside air temperature.
    The tire pressure increases as the tires
    become warm (e.g. during highway driving)
    with approximately 0.3 bar (4 psi). When
    the temperature of the tires changes by 50°
    (10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar
    (2 psi).

    Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
    tires are hot when you check them, only
    increase the pressure, if necessary.
    Underinflated tires wear more quickly than
    slightly overinflated tires.
    If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
    a new one.
    Important! Remember to adjust the tire
    pressures if you change the load in the car
    or intend to drive at substantially lower or
    higher speeds than normal.



  • Page 179

    Starting and driving

    Avoid driving with the trunk lid partly or fully
    open, since exhaust fumes can be drawn
    into the cabin.
    If you must drive with the trunk lid open, all
    windows and the sunroof (if fitted) must be
    closed and the cabin fan on at its highest
    speed setting.

    Driving in deep water
    NOTE
    Do not drive in water deeper than 11”
    (30 cm) and do not drive faster than at
    idling speed. Water can otherwise be
    sucked into the engine. The engine will be
    damaged if water enters the intake system. The car´s electrical systems may
    also be affected.

    Towing the car
    WARNING
    • The towing vehicle should always be
    heavier than the vehicle being towed.
    • Never allow passengers to ride in the
    car being towed.
    • Remember that the brake servo does
    not operate when the engine is off.
    Much greater pressure than normal
    will therefore be required to operate
    the brake pedal.
    • Nor does the steering pump operate
    when the engine is off. The steering
    will therefore be much heavier than
    usual.
    • Always seek professional help if the
    car needs to be towed.
    The car is fitted with towing eyes at both
    front and rear. For access to the front towing
    eye, located on the right-hand side of the
    car, compress the grille (see illustration)
    and pull it straight out.
    If the car is equipped with a trailer hitch, this
    can be used to tow another car.

    NOTE
    Do not confuse the front towing eye with
    the oil pipe for the power steering.

    IB1537

    Driving with the trunk lid
    open

    179

    Front towing eye

    Transporting the car
    NOTE
    If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is
    transported, for example on a flat bed
    truck, take extra care not to damage the
    spoiler and/or underbody.



  • Page 180

    180

    Starting and driving
    Towing a car with manual gearbox

    IB885

    IB1331

    The gear lever must be in neutral. Switch
    hazard lights on.
    Drive carefully and do not exceed the
    speed limit for vehicles in tow.
    Always try to keep the towrope taut by
    gently applying the brake as necessary.
    This will avoid the towrope being jerked violently.

    Rear towing eye

    Front towing eye, Saab 9-3 Viggen

    Saab 9-3 Viggen
    The front towing eye is stored in a storage
    bag beside the spare wheel. Remove the
    plastic cover with a screwdriver from the
    car’s toolkit, and screw in the towing eye.

    NOTE
    The design of the underside of the rear
    bumper means that the rear towing eye
    must not be used. This is to prevent damaging the bumper.

    NOTE
    If the car is to be towed with the front
    wheels off the ground, make sure the
    parking brake is off, as this acts on the
    rear wheels.



  • Page 181

    Starting and driving
    Towing a car with automatic
    transmission
    The following rules must be observed if a
    car with automatic transmission is to be
    towed.
    The gear selector must be in the N position.
    Switch hazard lights on.
    Drive carefully and do not exceed the
    speed limit for vehicles in tow.
    Always try to keep the towrope taut by
    gently applying the brake as necessary.
    This will avoid the towrope being jerked violently.

    NOTE
    The car must be towed front first.
    If the car is to be towed with the front
    wheels off the ground, make sure the
    parking brake is off, as this acts on the
    rear wheels.

    1 Selector lever in position N.
    2 The local regulations on towing speeds
    must be followed.
    The highest permissible towing speed is
    30 mph (50 km/h), unless the legal limit
    is lower. The longest permissible towing
    distance is 30 miles (50 km). If the car
    has to be transported farther than that,
    summon a tow truck. A flat bed tow truck
    is the preferred method to tow.
    The engine cannot be started by towing or
    pushing the car. In emergency, the engine
    can be started as described in the section
    ”Jump starting”.

    181

    Jump starting
    If your battery has run down, you may want
    to use another vehicle and some jumper
    cables to start your Saab. Follow the steps
    below to do it safely.

    WARNING
    Batteries can cause injury. They can be
    dangerous because:
    • They contain acid that can burn you.
    • They contain gas that can explode or
    ignite.
    • They contain enough electricity to
    injure you.
    If you do not follow these steps exactly,
    some or all of these things can hurt you.



  • Page 182

    Starting and driving

    NOTE
    Ignoring these steps could result in costly
    damage to your vehicle that would not be
    covered by your warranty.
    Trying to start your car by pushing or pulling it could damage your vehicle, even if
    you have a manual transmission. If you
    have an automatic transmission, your
    vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
    pulling it.
    To jump start your vehicle:
    1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
    12-volt battery with a negative ground
    system.

    NOTE
    If the other system is not a 12-volt system
    with a negative ground, both vehicles can
    be damaged.

    2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
    jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
    vehicles are not touching each other. If
    a poor connection on the negative
    jumper cable should exist, it is possible
    for damage to be caused to electrical
    systems/components of either vehicle
    should inadvertent contact be made.
    You would not be able to start your car
    and bad grounding could damage the
    electrical systems.
    IB886

    182

    WARNING
    You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
    Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in P
    (Park) or a manual transmission in Neutral.

    4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
    Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on the battery.

    WARNING
    3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
    Turn off all lights that are not needed,
    and radios. This will avoid sparks and
    help save both batteries and it could
    save your radio.

    NOTE
    If you leave your radio on, it could be
    badly damaged. The repairs would not be
    covered by your warranty.

    An electric fan can start up even when the
    engine is not running and can injure you.
    Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
    any underhood electric fan.



  • Page 183

    Starting and driving
    WARNING
    Using a match or flame of any kind near a
    battery can cause battery gas to explode.
    You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
    flashlight if you need more light.
    Be sure the battery has enough water.
    The battery installed in your new Saab
    has filler caps. Be sure the right amount
    of water is there. Add distilled or boiled
    water if the level is too low. If you don’t,
    explosive gas could be present.
    Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
    frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
    When connecting jumper cables to a
    frozen battery, gas from the chemical
    reaction inside the battery can build up
    under the ice and cause an explosion.
    Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
    you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
    flush the area with water and get medical
    help immediately.

    5 Check that the jumper cables do not
    have loose or missing insulation. If they
    do, you could get a shock and also the
    vehicles could be damaged.
    Before you connect the cables, here are
    some basic things you should know.
    Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
    negative (-) will go to a major metal
    engine part with a good ground. Do not
    connect (+) to (-) or you will get a short
    that could injure you or would damage
    the battery and maybe other parts as
    well.
    6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
    positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
    the discharged battery.
    7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
    Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
    the good battery. Use a remote positive
    (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
    8 Now connect the black negative (-)
    cable to the good battery’s negative terminal.

    WARNING
    Do not let the other end touch anything
    until the next step. The other end of the
    negative cable does not go to the dead
    battery. It goes to a major metal part with
    a good ground on the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

    183

    9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches
    (45 cm) away from the discharged battery, but not near engine parts that
    move. To avoid an arc which could detonate the hydrogen gas around the battery, the final connection must be at least
    18” from the battery.
    10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
    and run the engine for a while.
    11 Try to start the vehicle with the discharged battery. If it does not start after
    a few tries, it probably needs service.
    12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
    prevent electrical shorting. Take care
    that they do not touch each other or any
    other metal.



  • Page 184

    184

    Starting and driving

    Driving considerations
    with compact spare
    wheel/tire fitted
    WARNING
    Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) as the
    tire can overheat and adversely affect the
    handling of the car.
    The tire should be inflated to 60 psi
    (420 kPa).
    The following should be observed when the
    compact spare wheel (T115/70 R16) is
    installed:
    The compact spare is light and easy to
    handle when changing the wheel. Do not
    drive farther than necessary with the compact spare fitted – the maximum life of the
    wheel is only just over 2000 miles
    (3,500 km). Have the standard wheel
    repaired and reinstalled as soon as possible.

    Points to bear in mind when driving with a
    compact spare wheel:
    • The car’s ground clearance is reduced
    with the compact spare fitted.
    • Only one compact spare wheel may be
    used at any time.
    • Take care not to hit the curb.
    • Do not fit snow chains.
    • Leave the wheel cover off, so that the
    warning text is readily visible.

    NOTE
    To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
    wheel this can be placed outside up in the
    spare-wheel well but only while driving to
    the closest dealer.
    A general rule is that all heavy loads must
    be well secured in the luggage compartment, see page 142.

    For long trips
    Before starting off on a long journey, it is
    advisable to have your car inspected by
    your Saab dealer.
    Obtain a few important items to take along
    on your journey such as spare bulbs, wiper
    blades, fuses, a Poly-V belt and the like.
    You can check some points yourself beforehand:
    • Make sure that the engine is in good condition.
    • Check that no oil or fuel leaks out of the
    engine or gearbox/transmission.
    • Check the coolant and power steering
    fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
    • Inspect the Poly-V belt and replace it if it
    shows any signs of wear.
    • Check the battery charge.
    • Check the tires for tread pattern and air
    pressure, including the compact spare
    wheel.
    • Take an extra car key/remote control and
    keep it separate, see also page 36.
    • Check the brakes.
    • Check all bulbs.
    • Check for the presence of the tool kit and
    the jack in the car.



  • Page 185

    Car care

    185

    IB944

    Car care
    Hood release handle .......
    Engine ..............................
    Engine bay .......................
    Engine oil .........................
    Transmission fluid ..........
    Coolant .............................
    Air filter ............................
    Brake- clutch fluid and
    brake pads .....................
    Power steering ................
    Battery ..............................
    Drive belt..........................
    Wipers and washers .......
    Wiper blades ....................
    Changing bulbs ...............
    Fuses ................................
    Wheels..............................

    186
    188
    187
    190
    191
    192
    193
    194
    195
    195
    197
    198
    198
    200
    206
    211

    Safety belts.......................
    Upholstery and trim .........
    Textile carpeting ..............
    Engine bay........................
    Washing ............................
    Waxing and polishing......
    Touching up the paint .....
    Anti-corrosion treatment.
    Recovery and/or recycling of automotive materials..................................
    Air conditioning (A/C
    system) ...........................

    218
    219
    219
    220
    220
    221
    221
    222

    224
    226



  • Page 186

    186

    Car care

    Hood release handle

    WARNING
    Never hold your fingers between the hood
    and safety catch if lowering but not closing the hood.

    IB887

    1 Pull the release handle.
    2 The hood moves to the half-locked position and is stopped by a safety catch at
    the front edge.
    3 Press the lever of the catch upwards and
    raise the hood.
    When you close the hood you should drop it
    from a height of about 8 inches (20 cm),
    without slamming it.

    IB1514

    The handle of the hood lock is located on the
    left under the instrument panel. Open the
    hood in the following way:

    Hood release handle

    Hood release pressure plate



  • Page 187

    Car care

    Engine bay

    IB1625

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10

    Engine-oil dipstick
    Brake-fluid reservoir
    Power-steering fluid reservoir
    Fuse box
    Coolant reservoir
    MAXI fuses
    Washer-fluid reservoir
    Battery
    Drive belt
    Air filter

    187



  • Page 188

    188

    Car care

    Engine
    The engine is a transverse four-cylinder
    in-line engine with twin overhead camshafts
    and 16 valves.
    The engine is equipped with two balance
    shafts that reduce engine vibration to a minmimum.
    The balance shafts are chain-driven and
    rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
    They produce forces and torques that are
    opposed to those generated by the pistons
    and connecting rods. The effect occurs
    twice in each revolution of the engine, counteracting the vibration from its moving parts,
    and at the same time reducing unwanted
    engine noise.
    The gearbox, located on the right (viewed
    from the front), is integrated with the engine.

    Engine families
    Saab cars imported into the United States
    and Canada meet all applicable emission
    control standards. The engine family and
    appropriate tune-up specifications are identified on a label affixed to the left front inner
    fender.
    These engine families meet applicable EPA
    Federal Standards, California State Standards and Canadian Federal Standards and
    are equipped with the following systems:





    Sequential multiport fuel injection system.
    Three way catalytic converter.
    Crankcase emissions control system.
    Evaporative emission system.

    Emission control
    systems
    The systems for controlling emissions to the
    atmosphere require regular checking and
    adjustment at the intervals specified in the
    service program.
    In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
    regulations and thereby helping to keep the
    environment clean, a correctly tuned engine
    will also give maximum fuel economy.



  • Page 189

    Car care
    Saab Trionic engine management
    system
    The Saab Trionic engine management
    system is a unique Saab development that
    combines sequential multiport fuel injection,
    electronic distributorless ignition and turbocharger boost pressure control into one system.
    The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
    monitors many different engine parameters
    such as:
    • Intake manifold pressure.
    • Intake air temperature.
    • Crankshaft position.
    • Engine coolant temperature.
    • Throttle position.
    • The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
    The ECM receives information regarding
    engine knocking from a sophisticated feedback function in the ignition discharge unit.
    By processing all of this information, the Trionic system can control fuel injector opening duration, ignition timing and turbocharger boost pressure to provide excellent
    engine performance while maintaining low
    emissions and fuel consumption.

    NOTE
    The Trionic engine management system
    continuously monitors the operation of
    these systems and has on-board diagnostic capabilities (OBD II). If the CHECK
    ENGINE light in the main instrument illuminates, the Trionic ECM has detected a
    problem. The car will continue to operate,
    but performance may be diminished. You
    should have your car checked by a Saab
    dealer as soon as possible.

    189

    ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
    Recovery)
    All hydrocarbons formed when refueling will
    be recovered by the car and not released
    into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are
    absorbed in an evaporative emission canister. When the engine is subsequently
    started, the evaporative emission canister is
    gradually purged as air is sucked into it
    through a shut-off valve. The hydrocarbon/air mixture passes through the evap
    canister purge valve and into the engine
    where it is burned. "Refueling", see page
    151.
    When refueling, make sure you screw the
    filler cap on and keep turning until it has
    clicked at least 3 times. Otherwise, it is possible for the CHECK ENGINE light to illuminate and a TIGHTEN FUEL FILLER CAP
    message to appear on SID.



  • Page 190

    190

    Car care

    Engine oil

    Oil changing
    The engine oil must be changed in accordance with the service program.
    Oil volume and grade, see page 237.
    Oil changing should be carried out on a
    warm engine.

    Oil filler cap and dipstick
    1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of
    the sump and leave the oil to drain into
    an oil tray or other suitable receptacle for
    at least ten minutes. Take care, as the oil
    may be hot.
    2 After the oil has been drained, unscrew
    and remove the oil filter.
    3 Fit a new filter and tighten it by hand.
    4 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
    5 Add new oil.
    Run the engine to normal temperature and
    check the oil level.

    IB891

    Regularly check the oil level in the engine.
    Do this with the car standing on level ground
    with the engine warm, 2-5 minutes after it
    has been turned off. Take the dipstick out
    and wipe it off with a clean rag before carrying out the check.
    The level must not be below the MIN mark
    on the dipstick, but nor should it be above
    the MAX mark. Excess engine oil could
    result in abnormal oil consumption.
    The distance between MIN and MAX corresponds to a volume of about one quart.
    When necessary, add oil of the recommended grade via the dipstick pipe. Make
    sure that the cap of the dipstick is screwed
    on properly after the check.

    IB890

    Checking the fluid level

    Drain plug



  • Page 191

    Car care

    Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
    required more frequently (5000-mile
    intervals (8,000 km)) if any one of the following conditions apply to the car:
    • Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8
    to 16 km). This is particularly important
    when outside temperatures are below
    freezing.
    • Most trips include extensive idling
    (such as frequent stop-and-go driving).
    • Most trips are through dusty areas.
    • You frequenty tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle.
    • If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commerical
    applications.

    WARNING

    MAX
    +80°

    • Prolonged and repeated exposure of
    the skin to engine oil can cause serious skin disorders.
    • Avoid prolonged skin contact whenever possible. Wash the affected area
    thoroughly with soap and water after
    any contact.

    +80°
    MIN
    IB495

    NOTE

    191

    • Keep oil out of reach of children.
    • Do not touch the turbocharger or
    manifold. These get very hot when the
    engine has been running.
    • Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
    engine as this could cause a fire. Used
    engine oil is particularly flammable.
    • Protect the environment. Do not dispose of oil in the ground or down a
    drain. Dispose of all used oil and oil filters at an appropriate disposal facility.

    Oil dipstick, automatic transmission

    Transmission fluid
    Manual transmission
    Check and top up the fluid in accordance
    with the service program.
    If original fluid cannot be obtained for topping up, Dextron III (synthetic fluid) automatic transmission fluid can be used. If so,
    the car should be taken to an authorized
    Saab dealer as soon as possible to have the
    reason for low fluid level corrected and original fluid installed.

    Automatic transmission
    Check the fluid level as follows:
    1 Park the car on level ground and apply
    the parking brake. The automatic transmission fluid must be at normal running
    temperature, approximately 175°F



  • Page 192

    Car care

    (80°C). This can be achieved by driving
    the car for about 30 min on the open
    road.
    2 With the engine idling, move the selector
    lever to D and wait for at least
    15 seconds. Next, move the selector
    lever to R and wait for 15 seconds again.
    Finally, move the selector lever to P. Let
    the engine idle.
    3 Wipe the dipstick clean with a lint-free
    cloth and put it back.
    4 With the fluid at normal temperature, the
    level should be between the MAX and
    MIN marks on the dipstick. Top up, as
    necessary, with Texaco Texamatic Dextron III automatic-transmission fluid,
    adding it through the dipstick pipe. The
    distance between the MIN and MAX
    marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
    volume of approximately 0.4 qts
    (0.4 litre).

    NOTE
    If there is a burnt smell or the fluid is black,
    change the fluid as soon as possible.
    If the outside temperature is below 50°F
    (10°C), the fluid will not reach the specified
    temperature of 175°F (80°C). In this case,
    the correct fluid level may be 0.8 in (20 mm)
    below the MAX mark.

    Coolant
    WARNING
    • Proceed with caution if the radiator is
    boiling when you open the hood.
    Never remove the expansion-tank
    filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
    Loosen the cap carefully, and let the
    engine cool before removing the cap.
    • The cooling system is pressurized –
    hot coolant and vapor can escape
    when the filler cap is released.
    • Exercise care when adding coolant.
    Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
    fire risk.
    The expansion tank is transparent, to facilitate checking. The level must be a little
    under the mark ”KALT – COLD” on the tank
    when the engine is cold. If the SID message
    "FILL COOLANT FLUID" is displayed, the
    level in the expansion tank should be
    checked. Top up as necessary with equal
    parts of clean water and coolant. Use only
    coolant approved by Saab.
    If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
    is added, run the engine to normal temperature and top up again, as necessary.

    IB892

    192

    Coolant expansion tank

    Coolant
    The cooling system is filled at the factory
    with coolant containing a 50% concentration of a combined antifreeze and corrosion
    inhibitor. A weaker mixture will result in
    reduced anticorrosion protection. For protection against freezing in very cold
    weather, a stronger concentration will be
    needed.
    A 60% concentration of antifreeze will provide protection at temperatures down to
    -58 F (-50°C).



  • Page 193

    Car care
    The coolant does not normally have to be
    changed during the service life of the car.
    This type of coolant has a reddish colour
    and should not be mixed with other types of
    coolant. Saab Original coolant should be
    used all year round. Only use coolant
    approved by Saab.

    NOTE
    Always mix the antifreeze with the
    appropriate volume of water before
    adding it to the cooling system.
    If pure antifreeze is added, the engine
    could still freeze and be damaged. This is
    because the antifreeze will not mix
    properly with the coolant before the
    thermostat has opened to allow full
    circulation.

    Air filter
    WARNING
    Only use an air filter recommended by
    Saab Automobile AB.

    193



  • Page 194

    194

    Car care

    Brake- clutch fluid and
    brake pads

    Brake pad wear indicators

    Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
    old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
    water from the air and, in time, could allow
    vapor to form in the brake system, thus
    reducing its performance. It is therefore
    important that brake fluid be changed regularly, as specified in the service program.

    Checking the fluid level
    The combined brake and clutch-fluid reservoir is transparent to facilitate checking of
    the fluid level.
    The level should be between the MAX and
    MIN marks. Top up, as necessary, with
    DOT 4 fluid. Do not use DOT 5 brake fluid.
    Use only new brake fluid from a sealed container.
    Check that there are no leaks in the brake
    system.
    Changing of the brake fluid should be
    carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.

    IB894

    WARNING

    The vehicle´s regular braking system is
    adjusted automatically, but the parking
    brake has to be adjusted manually. This
    work, involving adjustment of the parking
    brake cables and brake pads, must only be
    carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
    It is not possible to detect, through abnormal
    pedal or parking brake-lever travel, whether
    brake pads are worn and need replacing. It
    is therefore essential that brake pads be
    checked regularly, as specified in the service program..

    NOTE
    Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
    since it can cause the paint to bubble and
    lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
    should be flushed with large quantities of
    water as quickly as possible.

    The outboard brake pads on the front
    wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
    When the lining is down to 0.11 in (3 mm),
    the pad will produce a screeching, squealing or scraping noise when the brakes are
    applied. New pads should be installed without delay.
    Brake pads should only be changed by
    an authorized Saab dealer. To ensure
    optimum brake performance, use only
    Saab original brake pads.



  • Page 195

    Car care

    Power steering

    Battery
    WARNING

    WARNING

    IB896

    Do not fill the power steering fluid to
    above the MAX mark. Too much fluid can
    result in leakage.
    Power steering fluid on hot engine components constitutes a fire risk.
    Check the level of the power-steering fluid
    in the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
    the service program.
    The wheels should point forward during the
    check.
    Clean around the cap before it is
    unscrewed.
    Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick. To
    check the fluid level, first screw the cap on
    fully again and then remove. The level
    should be between the MAX and MIN marks
    on the dipstick when the oil temperature is
    about 68°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder the oil
    level can be lower, and in higher temperatures the level can be higher, both of which
    are acceptable.
    Top up with power-steering fluid CHF 11S
    (part number 8996860).

    195

    Power steering fluid reservoir

    • Work on the battery may entail an
    explosion hazard, since the battery
    gives off hydrogen which forms an
    explosive mixture with the oxygen in
    the air.
    For this reason, always avoid sparks
    or open flames when working near the
    battery.
    • The battery contains corrosive sulphuric acid. Always wear a face mask or
    goggles when working on the battery.
    • If battery acid gets into the eyes or
    splashes the skin or clothing, wash the
    affected area liberally with water.
    If acid gets into the eyes or a large
    quantity makes contact with the skin,
    seek medical help.



  • Page 196

    196

    Car care

    Correct fluid level in the battery
    The liquid level in the car battery must be
    checked at regular intervals.

    NOTE
    Never use tap water to top up the battery.
    Use distilled or boiled water.
    Tap water contains salts and minerals that
    accelerate the corrosion of the battery electrodes, which can shorten the life of the battery.
    The charge level should be checked with a
    battery-acid tester. The specific gravity of
    the acid in a fully charged battery should be
    1.28. A specific gravity of 1.18 roughly indicates a 50% charge.

    IB897

    IB1173

    A car with standard equipment and a fully
    charged battery can be left for up to 40 days
    and still have a sufficient charge for starting.
    If extra equipment is fitted, such as a mobile
    telephone, the time may be reduced to
    about 15 days.
    Always connect the positive (red) cable to
    the positive (+) terminal of the battery and
    the negative (blue) cable to its negative (-)
    terminal. Always disconnect both battery
    leads when boost charging the battery.

    Taking out the battery

    NOTE
    A discharged battery can freeze and fracture. Batteries should therefore always be
    stored away from frost.
    If frequent short journeys are made in cold
    weather, the battery may need to be given a
    booster charge. This can be done either
    using a battery charger or by taking the car
    for a long drive.

    NOTE
    • Don’t connect the battery terminals
    + and – the wrong way around.
    • Serious damage can occur to the car’s
    electrical system if a battery or alternator lead is disconnected while the
    engine is running.



  • Page 197

    Car care

    Drive belt
    WARNING

    NOTE
    Serious damage can occur to the car’s
    electrical system if an alternator lead is
    disconnected while the engine is running.
    The alternator is situated on the right-hand
    side of the engine. It is driven via a poly-V
    belt from the crankshaft pulley.
    The poly-V-belt also drives the water pump,
    the A/C compressor and the steering servo
    pump.
    The belt tension is critical, and is adjusted
    by an automatic belt tensioner.
    See also page 61, "Warning charging".

    IB929

    • Keep hands and clothing clear of drive
    belts when engine is running.
    • Always stop the engine before
    inspecting drive belts.
    • The fan can start even when the
    engine is switched off.

    Drive belt

    197



  • Page 198

    198

    Car care

    Wipers and washers

    WARNING
    Take care not to spill washer fluid concentrate onto hot surfaces as this constitutes
    a fire hazard.

    IB901

    Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
    We recommend Saab washer fluid for
    cleaning.
    If poor wiper performance is experienced,
    clean the windshield with Saab washer fluid.
    This is particularly important if the car has
    been through an automatic car wash, as this
    sometimes leave a wax coating on the windshield.
    If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
    fit new blades.

    IB902

    Wiper blades

    Windshield and rear window
    1 Push the catch in (1).
    2 Pull the complete wiper blade downwards so that it comes away from the
    wiper arm. Slide the entire blade out
    from the arm.

    Headlight wipers
    1 Lift the wiper arm off the headlight.
    2 Detach the wiper blade by pulling it
    laterally from the wiper arm.
    3 Fit the new blade by sliding it into the
    retainer on the wiper arm and pressing it
    firmly home.



  • Page 199

    IB899

    IB900

    Car care

    Washer-fluid reservoir

    Washer
    The reservoir holds 5 quarts (4.7 litres).
    When the SID message "WASHER FLUID
    LEVEL LOW" appears there is about
    1.5 quarts (1.4 litres) left.
    Fill with quality washer fluid, available from
    your Saab dealer and follow the instructions
    on the package to reduce the risk of freezing.
    Note: If the reservoir is run dry and the car
    has a rear-window wiper, then after refilling
    you cannot wash the rear window until you
    have first washed the windscreen.

    Washer jets
    The washer jets, which are adjustable, can
    be cleaned with a pin if necessary.
    The jet for rear-window washing is located
    in the right-hand part of the high-mounted
    brake light.

    199



  • Page 200

    200

    Car care

    Changing bulbs
    WARNING
    Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine
    to avoid the danger of fingers and hands being injured by
    moving parts.

    IB903

    The radiator fan can cut in even when the engine is switched off.

    NOTE
    Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possible
    short-circuiting.

    Headlight
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    Unscrew the cover from the back of the light units.
    Unplug the connector.
    Unhook the spring clip by pushing it forward and then to the side.
    Remove the bulb.
    Insert the new bulb, without touching the glass with your fingers.
    Line it up so that the three lugs fit into the corresponding slots in
    the reflector and secure it with the spring clip.

    NOTE
    Do not fit bulbs with a rating above 60/55W, since the headlight
    reflector and the wiring of the car are not designed for a higher
    wattage.
    Do not touch the glass of the bulbs with your fingers. The oil on
    your skin can shorten the life of the bulb.

    1 Headlight bulb
    2 Parking-light bulb

    IMPORTANT! When changing bulbs, use the same type of bulb,
    (e.g. Long-life).
    Headlight aiming, see page 227.

    Parking lights
    The parking-light bulb is fitted in the same light unit as the headlight
    bulb.
    1 Remove the bulb holder from the lamp unit.
    2 Then take the bulb out of the holder.



  • Page 201

    IB904

    1 Retaining screw
    2 Turn signal bulb

    Front turn signal bulb
    To change the bulb, the complete lamp unit has to be removed.
    1 Loosen the screw (1). There is no need to remove it completely.
    2 Carefully remove the complete lamp unit.
    3 Grasp the two plastic tabs and turn the bulb holder counterclockwise.
    4 Pull the bulb holder out of the lamp unit and change the bulb.
    5 Check that the new bulb is firmly in place and has good contact.
    6 When mounting the lamp unit, see that the two guide lugs on the
    rear edge of the unit come inside the edge of the body panel.
    7 Insert the lamp unit in towards the headlight and see that the
    front bracket comes under the screw. Tighten the screw (1).

    201

    IB906

    Car care

    Side-mounted turn signal
    1 Slide the lens forward so that its rear part can be pulled out.
    2 Change the bulb.
    3 When refitting, make sure that the groove in the spring engages
    the edge of the body panel and that the rubber gasket is correctly
    positioned.



  • Page 202

    Front fog lights
    1 Slightly turn the bulb holder counterclockwise.
    2 Unplug the connector.
    3 Remove the bulb.

    WARNING
    • Never crawl under a car that is
    supported only by a jack.
    • Use axle stands; for further information about jacking up the car, see page
    216.

    Rear light clusters
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    Direction indicators
    Tail lights/stop lights
    Reversing lights
    Rear fog light
    High-mounted stop light

    IB907

    IB955

    Car care

    IB905

    202

    Stop lights, taillights and direction
    indicators
    1 Open the door in the trunk upholstery.
    2 Press aside the plastic tab that secures
    the bulb holder.
    3 Carefully pull the entire bulb holder out
    of the lamp unit. Replace the dead bulb.
    4 When the bulb holder is being refitted,
    check that its plastic catches snap into
    place.



  • Page 203

    1 Open the hatch on the inside of the
    trunk.
    2 Press down the plastic tab that secures
    the bulb holder.
    3 Carefully pull the entire bulb holder out
    of the lamp unit. Replace the dead bulb.
    4 When refitting the bulb holder, fit it in first
    at the lower edge. Then push the bulb
    holder in so that the plastic tab snaps
    into place.

    Dome light, front
    1 Insert a screwdriver on one side and pry
    gently upwards. Remove the cover lens.
    2 Change the bulb.

    IB968

    IB908

    Reversing lights and rear fog light

    203

    IB909

    Car care

    Dome light, rear
    1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
    ease out the trailing end of the dome
    light first, and then both front edges.
    2 Change the bulb.



  • Page 204

    Glove-compartment lighting (detach the
    whole lamp unit with a short screwdriver
    applied at the lower edge)

    License plate lighting (the glass is held in
    place by two screws)

    IB914

    IB913

    Car care

    IB910

    204

    Reading lamps, rear seat (Convertible)

    Reading lamps, 9-3 Convertible
    Detach the whole lamp unit by inserting a
    screwdriver into the notch and carefully
    prying the lamp unit out. Pull the bulb holder
    out of its bracket and change the bulb.
    Replace the bulb holder in its bracket and
    refit the entire lamp unit.

    Trunk light (detach the whole lamp unit
    with a screwdriver applied at one edge)

    Other lighting

    IB912

    If any other bulbs need changing, you are
    advised to take the car to an authorized
    Saab dealer.



  • Page 205

    Car care

    205

    Bulb table
    No. Cap

    Wattage

    1

    H4

    60/55

    Headlight

    2

    H1

    55

    Front fog light

    3

    W1,2W

    1,2

    Ashtray; cigarette lighter; warning
    light for safety belts

    4

    P21W

    21

    Rear fog light; reversing light

    5

    P21/5W

    21/5

    Stop/taillight

    6

    PY21W

    21

    Direction indicator, front/rear

    7

    T4W

    4

    Reading lamps, rear (Coupé and
    5-door)

    8

    R10W

    10

    Dome light; trunk; glove compartment

    9

    WY5W
    W5W

    5

    Side indicators (yellow bulb);
    license plate lighting; parking lights;
    reading lamps, front; reading lamps,
    rear (Convertible)

    IB1330

    NOTE
    Do not change any bulbs with ones of another wattage: only use
    what is stated.



  • Page 206

    Car care

    Fuses

    15

    10

    15

    15

    20

    20

    20

    15

    15

    10

    20

    15

    15

    15

    10

    10

    10

    10

    10

    30

    30

    15

    30

    IB917

    15

    30

    20

    20

    10

    20

    15

    Sound fuse/Blown fuse

    15

    • If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
    there is a major fault in the electrical
    system. Have the car checked without
    delay by an authorized Saab dealer.

    30

    • If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
    have the electrical system checked by
    an authorized Saab dealer.

    10

    • Never replace a fuse with one having a
    higher/lower rating than specified
    (see page 208). The color of the fuse
    indicates its amperage.

    10

    • Always consult an authorized Saab
    dealer before modifying or adding any
    electrical equipment. Failure to do so
    can result in the electrical system being
    damaged.

    10

    To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
    fire breaking out in the electrical system,
    the following advice should be heeded:

    30

    WARNING

    The fuses are housed in two fuse panels:
    one at the end of the instrument panel on the
    driver’s side, and one under the hood.
    To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
    from the panel (see below). If the filament is
    broken, the fuse has blown.
    A special tool for removing fuses is provided
    at the bottom of the fuse panel on the fascia.
    Simply push the tool onto the fuse, squeeze
    and remove the fuse.

    IB916

    206

    Tool for changing fuses



  • Page 207

    Car care
    DICE / TWICE

    IB920

    DICE = Dashboard Integrated Central Electronics
    TWICE = Theft-Warning Central Electronics
    DICE and TWICE are electronic control
    modules.
    DICE controls, among other things:

    MAXI fuse for soft-top system
    (Convertible)

    MAXI fuses
    The MAXI fuses are housed in the fuse box
    under the hood. These fuses can be
    checked in the same way as the other fuses.
    The MAXI fuses are designed to protect the
    car’s electrical system from being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a number of
    electrical circuits and functions and therefore has a higher rating (amperage) than the
    standard fuses. No spare MAXI fuses are
    supplied with the car.

    NOTE
    If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that there
    is a major fault in the electrical system.
    Have the car checked without delay by an
    authorized Saab dealer.






    Front lights and interior lighting.
    Instrument illumination.
    Intermittent wiper operation.
    Electric heating of rear window and door
    mirrors.
    TWICE controls, among other things:








    Central locking.
    Car alarm (Anti-theft system).
    Engine immobilizer.
    Auto checking of lights.
    Electric heating of rear seat.
    Safety belt reminder.
    Electrically adjustable passenger seat.

    207

    The DICE and TWICE control modules are
    linked to a data bus, which is basically an
    information carrier that allows information to
    be exchanged between all the control modules and components connected to the bus.
    If a fault occurs in any of these components,
    diagnostic faults codes are set in the relevant control module, which enhances fault
    diagnosis at the Saab dealer.
    The scan tool connector for fault diagnosis
    is located under the instrument panel on the
    driver’s side.



  • Page 208

    208

    Car care

    15

    15

    10

    15

    15

    30

    A B C 1 2 3 4 5 6
    15

    15

    20

    20

    20

    20

    20

    10

    10

    10

    6A 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
    15

    15

    15

    20

    10

    30

    30

    10

    16B 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
    10

    10

    10

    10

    10

    15

    15

    25 26 27 28 29 30 31
    15

    30

    30

    20

    10

    32 33 34 35 36

    IB918

    30

    37 38 39

    Fuse holder on the end of the instrument panel

    6
    6A
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    16B
    17

    30
    7.5
    30
    15
    7.5
    10
    7.5
    20
    15
    30
    20
    30
    30
    15

    Fuses
    No. Amp
    A

    B
    10
    C
    30
    1
    30
    2
    3
    4

    20
    30
    15

    5

    30

    Function

    Stop lights, trailer
    Cabin fan, ACC
    Electrically heated rear window and rear-view mirrors
    Direction indicators
    Cabin fan, A/C
    Trunk light; switch illumination; electrically powered
    radio antenna
    Electrically operated front seat, right

    18
    19
    20

    10
    10
    20

    Cigarette lighter
    Automatic transmission
    Rear window operators, rear-view mirrors, sunroof
    Rear wiper
    ACC panel
    Horn
    DICE / TWICE
    Stop lights; front fog lights
    Diagnostics; radio
    Front window motors; soft top (Convertible)
    Daytime running lights
    Electrically operated front seat, left
    Control module, engine management system
    Control module, engine management system;
    DICE/TWICE; main instrument panel/SID; memory
    for electrically operated driver’s seat; telephone;
    cruise control
    Airbag
    ABS; A/C; rear fog light; switch, rear fog light
    Electric heating, front seats; switch, electrically
    heated rear window



  • Page 209

    Car care
    Relay holder
    No. Amp
    21 10
    22 15
    23 20
    24
    7.5
    25 30
    26
    30
    27 15
    28 10
    29 10
    30 10
    31 20
    32
    33
    34
    35

    15
    15
    10
    15

    36
    37
    38
    39
    S

    10
    15
    25



    Function
    Switch, manual A/C; soft top (Convertible)
    Direction indicators; Cruise Control
    Soft top (Convertible); telephone
    Radio
    Central locking; amplifier
    Control module, engine management system
    High beam flash; ACC
    Control module, engine management system
    Right parking light; license plate lighting
    Left parking light
    Reversing light; windshield wipers; headlight
    beam-length adjustment
    Fuel pump
    Electric heating of rear seat
    SID; control module; automatic transmission
    DICE/TWICE; main instrument panel; interior lighting
    Relay, starter
    Limp-home
    Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)

    Spare

    Under the instrument panel next to the steering wheel
    Item
    A
    B
    C1
    C2
    D1
    D2
    E
    F
    G1
    G2
    H
    I
    J
    K
    L

    Function
    Electric heating of rear seat
    Reversing light, cars with automatic transmission

    Lock motor, trunk lid
    Rear wiper
    Rear-window washing
    Ignition switch

    Horn
    Windshield wipers (intermittent)
    Rear-window heating
    Fuel pump

    Start relay
    Main relay (injection system)

    209



  • Page 210

    210

    Car care

    Fuses and relays
    No.
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    MAXI 1
    MAXI 2
    Item
    A
    B
    C1
    C2

    Amp

    15
    40
    10
    15
    10
    10
    10
    10
    7.5



    10
    15
    30
    50

    Function

    Front fog lights
    Radiator fan, low speed
    Vacuum pump
    A/C-compressor
    Left low beam
    Right low beam
    Left high beam
    Right high beam
    Headlight wipers

    Extra lights

    Extra heater; water pump (Europe)
    Extra heater (Europe)
    Radiator fan, high speed
    ABS

    Amp Function
    Low beam
    High beam
    Extra heater (Europe)


    IB919

    Fuse panel in engine bay

    Fuses and relays in engine bay (left side)

    D
    E
    F1
    F2
    G1
    G2
    H
    I
    J




    Radiator fan, low speed
    Lamp check (filament monitor, front)


    Headlamp wipers
    Front fog lights

    Radiator fan, high speed
    A/C-compressor



  • Page 211

    Car care

    Wheels
    Alternative wheels and tires
    If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than
    those supplied with the car, consult your
    Saab dealer first as to the possibilities available.
    Wheels/tires combinations that are not
    approved by Saab can negatively affect the
    car´s directional stability, steering and braking in both wet and dry conditions.
    Do not assume that a wheel/tire combination will function properly just because it will
    bolt on.
    To ensure that the speedometer is as accurate as possible it should be reprogrammed
    if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
    Contact an authorized Saab dealer.

    211

    Tire pressure
    NOTE
    For wide wheels and/or low-profile tires,
    bear in mind the following:
    • Tires and wheels can be damaged in
    potholes etc.
    • Springs, shock absorbers and wheel
    bearings and body mountings can be
    overloaded.
    • The wheels can come into contact with
    chassis and body components.
    • The speed and load limits for the tires
    must not be exceeded; see page 212.
    • Wheels larger than 17” must not be
    fitted on the Saab 9-3. For Viggen
    models the wheel should not be larger
    than 17”. The maximum permissible
    offset for the 9-3 is 49 mm and for the
    Viggen 42 mm.
    • Wheels smaller than 16” must not be
    fitted on Viggen models. Fitting a
    smaller size wheel on a Viggen is not
    possible due to the size of the brake
    discs.
    The wheels and tires have been carefully
    matched to the characteristics of the car and
    play a key role in its outstanding roadholding and handling.

    NOTE
    Check the tire pressures at least once
    per month.
    Underinflation is the main cause of:
    • Tires wearing out prematurely.
    • Damage to the sidewalls.
    • Damage to the wheels.
    Tires need to be inflated to suit the load carried and the maximum speed the car will be
    driven (see the recommended tire pressures on the back cover). Tire pressure
    label, see page 243.
    Note that all values apply to cold tires. For
    tires with an aspect ratio less than /60,
    increase the tire pressure by 3 psi (20 kPa)
    for rough roads with potholes to minimize
    the risk of rim damage.
    Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
    tires are hot when you check them, only
    increase the pressure, if necessary.
    Soft tires will cause faster wear than
    over-pressurized tires. They also increase
    fuel consumption.
    If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
    a new one.
    Important! Remember to adjust the tire
    pressures if you change the load in the car
    or intend to cruise at a substantially higher
    or lower speed than normal.



  • Page 212

    212

    Car care

    Rotating the tires
    WARNING
    When fitting just one new pair of tires,
    these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
    as these are more critical to the directional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
    or in a skid). The existing rear tires should
    therefore be moved to the front. Always
    move left rear to left front and right rear to
    right front, so that the direction of rotation
    remains the same.
    Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
    tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
    tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
    tires on the same axle have the same
    amount of tread.
    The wheels should be marked, L (left) and
    R (right), when changing between summer
    and winter (snow) tires. This ensures that
    the direction of rotation of the wheels is the
    same when they are refitted. Fit the tires in
    best condition to the rear wheels.
    Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
    standing upright.

    Tire markings

    Winter tires

    An example of the meaning of the different
    markings in a tire size is given below for a
    tire size of 205/55 R16 91V:

    Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
    winter climates where the majority of your
    driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
    tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
    maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
    dealer can advise you of to the correct size
    tire for your car (if different from the original
    size) and also supply Saab approved winter
    tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.

    205 Tire section width, mm
    55 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
    is 60 % of the section width
    R Radial ply
    16 Wheel rim diameter 16 in. at bead
    seats
    91 Tire load code
    V Speed marking
    Speed ratings
    S Tire approved for speeds up to
    112 mph (180 km/h)
    T Tire approved for speeds up to
    118 mph (190 km/h)
    H Tire approved for speeds up to
    130 mph (210 km/h)
    V Tire approved for speeds up to
    150 mph (240 km/h)
    W Tire approved for speeds up to
    167 mph (270 km/h)
    Y Tire approved for speeds up to
    186 mph (300 km/h)

    Tire quality grading (cars sold in
    U.S.)
    New tires must be graded and labeled in
    accordance with new Federal regulations.
    Standard tests are conducted to measure
    performance in the areas of traction and
    temperature resistance. Refer to the tire
    sidewall for the specific quality grades of the
    tires provided on your new Saab. Compact
    spare tires are exempt.
    DOT QUALITY GRADES
    • Treadwear.
    • Traction AA, A, B, C.
    • Temperature A, B, C.
    All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these
    grades.



  • Page 213

    Car care

    213

    Uniform Tire Quality Grading (US)

    Traction

    Temperature

    Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
    Treadwear 200 Traction AA
    Temperature A

    The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
    are AA, A, B and C. These grades represent
    the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
    measured under controlled conditions on
    specified government test surfaces of
    asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
    have poor traction performance.

    The temperature grades are A (the highest),
    B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
    to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
    conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
    test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
    cause the material of the tire to degenerate
    and reduce tire life. Excessive temperature
    can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
    corresponds to a level of performance
    which all passenger car tires must meet
    under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
    Standard No. 109.
    Grades B and A represent higher levels of
    performance on the laboratory test wheel
    than the minimum required by law.

    Treadwear
    The treadwear grade is a comparative
    rating based on the wear rate of the tire
    when tested under controlled conditions on
    a specified government test course. For
    example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
    and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
    relative performance of tires depends upon
    the actual conditions of their use, however,
    and may depart significantly from the norm
    due to variations in driving habits, service
    practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

    WARNING
    The traction grade assigned to a tire is
    based on straight-ahead braking, traction
    test and does not include acceleration,
    cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction
    characteristics.

    WARNING
    The temperature grade for a tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
    and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
    underinflation, or excessive loading,
    either separately or in combination, can
    cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.



  • Page 214

    Car care

    Date code

    Wear indicators

    Date code

    Wear indicators

    Tires should be regarded as perishable
    goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes
    progressively harder, and the roadholding
    ability of the tires diminishes. This is particularly true on winter tires.
    Tires now have a date-code marking for the
    year of manufacture. The first two digits
    denote the week number and the last two
    digits the year. The ”<” symbol points to the
    year.
    Accordingly, a date code of 0200 signifies
    that the tire was manufactured in week 02,
    2000.

    The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
    form of smooth, treadless strips across the
    width, which become visible when only
    2/32" (1.6 mm) of tread remains. As soon as
    the indicators become visible, new tires
    should be fitted without delay.
    Make sure you are familiar with the legal
    limit for minimum tread depth in your
    country and also any regulations governing the use of winter (snow) tires.

    IB921

    IB998

    IB969

    214

    Spare wheel (under the carpet in the
    trunk)

    Compact spare wheel
    The compact spare is light and easy to
    handle when changing the wheel. Its use is
    only permitted when a standard tire has sustained a puncture. The maximum life of the
    tire is only 2000 miles (3,500 km).
    Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
    compact spare fitted.
    The compact spare should be inflated to
    60 psi (420 kPa). Carry the punctured tire in
    the spare-wheel well under the trunk floor.
    Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
    as soon as possible
    Driving considerations with compact spare
    wheel/tire fitted, see page 184.
    The spare wheel, the tools and the jack with
    its crank are carried under a panel in the
    trunk.



  • Page 215

    Car care
    Changing a wheel
    WARNING

    IB1262
    IB1261

    • The car jack is designed solely for use
    in changing a wheel or fitting snow
    chains. It must not be used to support
    the car during repair work or servicing.

    Spare wheel (under the carpet in the
    trunk), Saab 9-3 Viggen
    When changing a wheel, take the tool kit out
    first, then the spare wheel.

    NOTE
    To avoid damaging an alloy wheel with a
    flat tire, this can be placed outside up in
    the spare-wheel well but only while driving to the closest workshop.
    A general rule is that all heavy loads must
    be well secured in the luggage compartment, see page 142.

    • Never crawl under a car that is
    supported only by a jack.
    • Special care must be taken if the car is
    on a slope – use wheel chocks!
    • Position chocks, one ahead and one
    behind, the wheel that is diagonally
    opposite to the one to be changed.
    • Switch on the hazard warning lights if
    the car is on a road.
    • Apply the parking brake and leave the
    car in gear (1st or reverse). Automatic
    transmission: move selector to the
    P position.
    • Ensure that everybody is out of the car
    before jacking it up.
    • Never start the engine while the car is
    jacked up.
    • The jack must stand on a firm, level
    surface.

    215

    • Stow the jack in the place provided for
    it under the panel in the floor of the
    trunk. Secure it properly to avoid injury
    to passengers in the event of a crash.
    • Do not use the jack for any purpose
    other than for jacking up the car.
    • If light-alloy wheels have been fitted to
    the car for several years and a change
    is made to steel wheels, the threads
    for the wheel bolts in the brake discs
    should be cleaned before the thinner
    steel wheels are fitted. The innermost
    threads in the holes may be clogged
    with sand, salt and rust so that the correct tightening torque cannot be
    achieved.



  • Page 216

    IB1538

    Car care

    IB924

    216

    Position for jack
    When it is time to raise the car, apply the
    jack to one of the four jacking points (front or
    rear) located beneath the sills.
    If a floor jack is used it can be applied to the
    standard jacking points used by the dealer
    or centrally under the front of the engine
    subframe. If the car is equipped with a trailer
    hitch, the jack can also be placed under the
    hitch.

    NOTE
    • Do not position the jack under the rear
    axle or under the rear floor.
    • Only use the points specified on
    page 217.

    Positioning the jack
    1 Put the car in 1st gear (automatic transmission: move selector to the P position)
    and apply the parking brake.
    Saab 9-3 Viggen: The front and rear
    jacking points are located behind covers
    that must be removed. See page 217.
    2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
    before placing it under the recess in the
    sill.
    3 Make sure that the jack fully engages
    the recess in the sill and that the base of
    the jack is steady and flat on the ground.
    4 Turn the jack handle clockwise until it
    just begins to lift the car.

    5 Remove the wheel cover (where applicable). Loosen the wheel bolts by half a
    turn.
    6 Turn the jack handle to raise the wheel
    clear of the ground. Remove the wheel
    bolts and lift off the wheel.
    7 Clean the contact surfaces between the
    rim and hub.
    8 Fit the wheel and screw in the bolts in the
    sequence shown (opposite pairs).
    Tighten the studs enough for the studs
    and wheel to be seated correctly.
    See page 218 for sequence.
    9 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
    bolts to the correct torque in the
    sequence shown (opposite pairs).
    Tightening torque:
    Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs (110 Nm).
    Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs (110 Nm)



  • Page 217

    IB1174

    Position for jack, Saab 9-3 Viggen. The front and rear jacking points are located behind
    covers that must be removed. Remove the covers by taking hold of the lower edge and
    pulling outwards. When replacing the covers, fit the catches along the top edge first and
    then press home the cover.

    217

    IB1311

    Car care

    Jacking points for a floor jack.

    NOTE

    NOTE
    When refitting wheel covers (where
    applicable), make sure that the valve
    protrudes through the hole in the wheel
    cover.

    10 Recheck the wheel bolts after a few
    miles.
    Tightening torque:
    Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs (110 Nm)
    Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs (110 Nm)
    We advise against using wheels with open
    wheel covers in winter, as the brake components are then more exposed both to slush
    and to road salt and grit.

    Do not overtighten the bolts using an
    impact wrench: not only can this damage
    the wheels but it can also make it impossible to undo the bolts using the wheel
    wrench in the car’s toolkit.

    Tire chains; see page 172.
    NOTE
    Saab 9-3 Viggen: The minimum permissible wheel diameter is 16”, due to the
    size of the brake discs.



  • Page 218

    218

    Car care

    IB923

    Flat spotting

    Removing the wheel cover

    All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
    or when the car is driven hard. After the car
    has been parked with hot tires and the tires
    have cooled down, a flat spot can form in the
    tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
    The same can occur if the car has not been
    moved for a long time.
    Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
    felt through the steering wheel, similar to
    that experienced when the wheels need balancing. Flat spots of this type disappear
    once the tires get hot again, usually after
    10–15 miles (20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed.

    Safety belts
    WARNING
    Safety belts and belt pretensioners that
    were in use in a serious crash must be
    replaced even if they are not visibly
    damaged.
    No attempt must be made to repair, or
    modify the function of, safety belts.
    A check should be made periodically to
    ensure that the safety belts are working
    properly.
    • Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.
    The safety belt should lock and it should
    not be possible to withdraw it further.
    A sharp tug on the belt should cause the
    inertia reel to lock. Check the floor anchorage points for corrosion damage. If a belt is
    worn or has any fraying edges, it should be
    replaced.
    Safety belts must not come into contact with
    substances such as polishes, oil or chemicals. If the belts get dirty, wash them with
    warm water and a detergent or have them
    replaced.

    IB925

    Tightening sequence, wheel bolts



  • Page 219

    Car care

    Upholstery and trim
    To remove fluff or hairs from the seat upholstery or headlining, use a moist, lint-free
    cloth or a special lint remover (brush or
    roller). Remove any dirty marks using a
    cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
    water.
    When using a stain remover, always work
    from the outside towards the center to avoid
    leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
    remain, it can usually be removed using
    lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
    Wet patches left by spilled soft drinks or thin
    oil must be wiped off immediately using an
    absorbent material, such as paper toweling,
    and treated with stain remover.
    Isopropyl alcohol is recommended for
    removing grease or oil stains, and a
    semi-stiff brush may also be used.

    Cleaning and caring for leather
    upholstery
    The principal reason for treating leather
    upholstery is to maintain its elegant appearance and to provide it with a protective film.
    Discoloration caused by dust and wear
    mainly affects the lighter shades, although
    this is not detrimental to the leather –
    indeed, the patina resulting from use is often
    considered desirable in leather. But if the
    leather is allowed to become too grubby, it
    can start to look shabby.
    The leather upholstery should be cleaned
    and reconditioned twice a year in conjunction with spring and autumn inspections. In
    very warm, dry climates the leather may
    need more regular reconditioning. Recommended conditioner - Saab Leather Care
    Lotion.
    Do not use unknown harsh polishing
    agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse
    soap or hot water.
    The leather will be clean and attractive for
    many years.

    219

    Textile carpeting
    Vacuum clean the carpeting regularly. Carpets can also be cleaned using a brush, or
    carpet shampoo applied with a sponge. Do
    not use vacuum cleaners outdoors unless
    they are properly grounded.



  • Page 220

    220

    Car care

    Engine bay

    Washing

    Clean the engine compartment using an
    engine detergent and rinse with hot water.
    Cover the headlights. Do not use a
    high-pressure washer
    Avoid spraying the hood liner, as this can
    become heavy and hang down and touch
    the engine when the hood is closed.
    Do not use gasoline as a cleaning agent or
    solvent when carrying out repairs or maintenance. Saab recommends the use of environmentally safe degreasing agents.

    The bodywork must be washed frequently.
    When the car is new, the body should be
    washed by hand using plain cold water and
    a clean, soft brush, or in a brushless carwash that uses mild detergent. Automatic
    carwashes with brushes should be avoided
    when the car is new. Do not use automatic
    car washes for the first five or six months,
    before the paintwork has hardened properly. Thereafter, use a high quality car wash
    soap added to lukewarm water.
    Do not use a pressure washer at close
    range on stone chip damage, scratches or
    other damage to the paintwork. The paint
    can otherwise start to flake.
    Remove any bird droppings without delay,
    as these can discolor the paintwork and
    prove difficult to polish out.
    Use a soft cloth moistened with methyl alcohol to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do
    not use strong cleaners, as these can dry
    out the paintwork.

    NOTE
    Avoid using any alcohol-based cleaners
    on the front and rear light clusters, as
    these can cause cracking of the lenses.

    The underside of the car also needs washing regularly, and this should be done very
    thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
    underside of the car by hand if the car is usually washed in an automatic car wash without special facilities for underbody cleaning.
    Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
    sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
    immediately after washing to avoid smears
    and streaks.
    Clean the window glass inside and out using
    a high quality window cleaner. This is particularly important when the car is new, as
    upholstery and trim have a tendency to
    sweat a little at first.
    Keep the glass well cleaned, as this helps to
    prevent misting.



  • Page 221

    Car care

    221

    Touching up the paint
    NOTE
    • Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.
    Wet brake discs reduce the braking
    effect.

    • Clean the rod of the electrically powered antenna about once a month with
    a clean, dry rag.
    IMPORTANT! Use no oil, nor any silicone-based cleaning product.
    • Fixed antennas must be removed
    when going through an automatic car
    wash.
    • Saab 9-3 Viggen: If you wash the car
    in an automatic car wash, you must
    first remove the roof-mounted
    antenna, otherwise it will be damaged.

    IB1271

    • Turn off the radio before entering an
    automatic car wash so the power
    antenna mast does not get damaged.

    Removing the roof-mounted antenna,
    Saab 9-3 Viggen.

    Waxing and polishing
    Do not wax a new car during the first three
    or four months. In fact, there is no need to
    polish the car before the paintwork has
    started to go dull through oxidation. Other
    than in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive polishes containing a cutting agent on
    a new car. Always wash the car thoroughly
    before waxing or polishing.

    Damaged paintwork should be treated as
    soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
    the greater the risk of corrosion. The
    anti-perforation warranty does not cover
    corrosion resulting from untreated defects.
    Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
    usually extensive and can only be properly
    restored by professionals.
    However, you can repair small scratches
    and stone-chip damage yourself. The necessary tools and materials, such as primer,
    touch-up paint and brushes, are available
    from your Saab dealer.
    In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
    where the metal has not been exposed and
    an undamaged layer of paint remains,
    touch-up paint can usually be applied
    directly, after any dirt has been scraped
    away using a pointed knife.
    If corrosion has already set in, e.g. as a
    result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
    knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possible, the damaged area should be taken
    back to the bare metal. The metal should
    then be primed with two thin coats of primer
    applied by brush.
    After the primer has dried, apply several thin
    layers of topcoat enamel until the surface of
    the repaired area is flush with the surrounding paintwork.
    Stir both primer and touch-up enamel thoroughly before use and allow each coat to
    dry before applying the next.



  • Page 222

    222

    Car care

    Anti-corrosion
    treatment

    As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
    applied in two operations. The first coat, the
    base color, contains the pigment, metal
    flakes and binder. The second coat consists
    of a clear enamel, which provides the final
    gloss for the paintwork and protects the
    base from moisture and environmental contaminants.
    Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
    1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
    2 Then apply the primer, base color, and
    finally, the enamel. To achieve the best
    finish, apply two or three coats of primer.

    IB1334

    Two-coat enamel

    Surface-treatment composition
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7

    Body panel
    Zinc (certain parts) 7.5 µm
    Phosphate coating
    Cathodic ED 28 µm
    Intermediate coat 35 µm
    Metallic base/solid base15 µm
    Clear enamel 40 µm

    The entire car is corrosion-protected at the
    factory in different stages by an electrolytic
    immersion coating and a polyester-based
    protective coating to protect against corrosion caused by stones flung up by the
    wheels. A thin penetrating anti-rust oil is
    also applied in cavities and body members.
    In addition to conventional anti-corrosion
    treatment like painting, underbody treatment and cavity treatment, most of the body
    panel surfaces are galvanized. These
    include the hood, the doors and the underbody.
    The anti-corrosion treatment on the underside of the car and inside the wheel arches
    is particularly exposed to constant wear and
    possible damage, the degree of which will
    obviously depend on driving conditions.



  • Page 223

    Car care

    IB926

    Preventive maintenance

    Drainage holes in doors

    What causes rust?
    Steel body panels of automobiles are subject to rusting whenever air and moisture
    manage to penetrate the protective finish.
    Body panels may rust through if the process
    is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever
    water is trapped or where the car’s panels
    are continuously damp.
    Damage to paint and undercoating by
    stones, gravel and minor crashes immediately exposes metal to air and moisture.
    Road salts used for de-icing will collect on
    the bottom of the car and promote rusting.
    Areas of the country with high humidity have
    a greater potential for rust problems, especially where salt is used on roads or there is
    moist sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout)
    may also damage paint and promote rusting.

    The following procedures are necessary to
    help protect against rusting. Refer also to
    the terms and conditions of the Performation Limited Warranty described in the warranty booklet.
    1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
    least twice a year. Under adverse conditions, where there is a rapid buildup of
    dirt, sand or road salt, wash your car at
    least once a week. After extreme exposure to salted snow or slush, evidenced
    by a white film on the car, wash the car
    immediately. Frequent washing will prevent paint damage from acid rain and
    other airborne contaminants such as
    tree sap and bird droppings. If any of
    these contaminants are noticed on the
    car the finish should be washed immediately.
    • Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
    with water to loosen and flush off heavy
    concentrations of dirt (include the
    underbody).
    • Sponge the car with a solution of either
    a good quality car soap or mild general
    purpose (dish washing) detergent and
    water.
    • Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
    • After washing, check and clear all
    drains in doors and body panels.
    • Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
    chamois.

    223

    2 Clean the underside of the car during
    the winter. Use high pressure water to
    clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
    wheel wells) at least at mid-winter and in
    the spring.
    3 Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
    damage, and arrange for needed
    repairs promptly. After washing or
    after heavy rain, check for leaks. When
    washing the car inspect body surfaces
    for paint damage. While checking for
    leaks, lift the floor mats and check
    underneath them. Water can collect in
    these areas and remain for prolonged
    periods. Dry any wet areas including the
    floor mats. Have leaks repaired as soon
    as possible.
    Use touch-up paint to repair small
    scratches or minor finish damage. Areas
    where metal is exposed will rust quickly
    and MUST be repaired immediately by
    touch-up or professional repainting.
    Rust must be removed, the bare metal
    primed and painted. Major body
    damage should be repaired immediately
    and new panels or exposed areas
    should be undercoated with anti- corrosion material.
    Repairs of this type are the owner’s
    responsibility and are not covered under
    warranty.



  • Page 224

    224

    Car care

    Inspect the undercoating and touch up if
    necessary. Pay particular attention to the
    fenders and wheel housings, which are
    exposed to abrasion by flying gravel, etc. If
    the composition has worn or flaked off, the
    steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried
    before a fresh coat is applied. The cleaning
    is best done with a scraper and a steel wire
    brush, followed by washing with solvent.
    Apply the new coating thinly, otherwise it
    may run off or fall off when dry.

    Recovery and/or
    recycling of automotive
    materials
    A typical car consists of metals (65–75%),
    plastics (10–15%), rubber (5%) and small
    quantities of glass, wood, paper and textiles.
    Some of these materials can be recycled,
    while others can be recovered in chemical
    processes for reuse in new products or as a
    source of energy.
    While the Saab 9-3 was still at the drawing-board stage, Saab engineers were
    giving serious consideration to how the
    maximum quantity of materials could be
    reclaimed from the car on its eventual
    scrapping. To facilitate sorting, plastic parts,
    for instance, have been marked to identify
    the precise nature of the plastic.

    Approximately 90% of the materials in the
    car can be recycled or recovered, where
    facilities exist.
    Before the car is scrapped, all the oils and
    other fluids that could pollute the environment should be recovered from the car. It
    may be of interest in this context to learn that
    the refrigerant used in the Saab 9-3’s A/C
    and ACC systems (R134a) contains neither
    CFCs nor any other chlorine compounds



  • Page 225

    Car care

    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24

    A-pillar trim: PC/ABS.
    Windshield trim: PP, PP/EPDM.
    Seals: EPDM.
    Rear-window casing PUR.
    Trim panel ABS.
    C/D-pillar trim PP.
    Rear light cluster: PMMA.
    Corner filler panel PPO/PA.
    Rear bumper
    Expanded PP core
    PP/EPDM sheathing.
    Fuel tank PE.
    Side-window casing:
    PP/EPDM.
    Side trim PVC.
    A-pillar upholstery textile trim: polyester.
    Rearview mirror: ABS.
    Sill scuff plate: PP/EPDM.
    Wheel-arch liner: PP.
    Wheel cover: PA.
    Direction-indicator lamp lens: PMMA.
    Front spoiler: PP/EPDM.
    Front bumper,
    cellular core, expanded PP,
    sheathing: PP/EPDM.
    Fan shroud: PP.
    Radiator grille: ABS.
    Washer-fluid reservoir: PE.
    Cowl trim: PC/ASA.

    ABS
    ASA
    EPDM
    PA
    PC
    PE
    PMMA
    POM
    PPO
    PP
    PUR
    PVC

    Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
    Acrylonitrile-styrene (acrylic plastic)
    Ethylene-propylene rubber
    Polyamide (plastic)
    Polycarbonate (plastic)
    Polyethylene
    Polymethyl methacrylate
    Acetal plastic
    Polyphenylene oxide (plastic)
    Polypropylene
    Polyurethane
    Polyvinyl chloride

    3

    4

    2
    5
    1
    6
    7

    24

    8

    23
    9

    22
    21

    IB927

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    20

    10

    12
    11

    19

    16

    13

    17
    18

    15

    14

    225



  • Page 226

    226

    Car care

    Air conditioning
    (A/C system)
    NOTE
    • The A/C system is designed for use
    with R134a refrigerant.
    • Refrigerant handling requires special
    equipment and special procedures for
    charging and draining the system.
    • All repairs and adjustments on the A/C
    system must be carried out by a Saab
    dealer authorized for this kind of work.
    • Never mix R134a and R12 refrigerants.

    WARNING
    • The A/C system is pressurized. Do not
    break any connections or undo A/C
    system components.
    • Escaping refrigerant gas can cause
    visual impairment or other injury.

    Fault diagnosis
    If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
    a number of checks you can perform yourself. If the fault persists, however, have the
    system checked by an authorized Saab
    dealer.
    Important!
    When the A/C system is in operation, moisture from the air will condense on the evaporator. When the car is then parked, this
    condensation will drip off the evaporator
    and form a small pool of water on the
    ground. This is normal. The warmer the
    ambient air and the higher the humidity, the
    greater the amount of condensation formed.

    Inadequate cooling:
    a Make sure that the temperature and
    air-distribution controls are in the
    appropriate settings, see page 81.
    b Check that the condenser (forward of
    the radiator) has not become clogged
    with dirt and insects.
    c Make sure that the drive belt for the compressor is not slipping, see page 197.
    d Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
    and compressor, see page 208.



  • Page 227

    Car care
    Maintenance
    • The drive belt for the compressor should
    be inspected under the regular service
    program.
    • Clean dirt and insects away from the condenser and radiator to prevent clogging.
    When washing the car, use the hose to
    spray the radiator and condenser (located
    forward of the radiator) from both sides
    (both from the front of the car and from
    inside the engine bay). Do not use a pressure washer.
    Caution: Do not use the hose when the
    engine is hot.
    Other than in extremely cold weather, do not
    cover the radiator, e.g. with screen netting,
    as this will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
    Note: The A/C system will only operate
    when the outdoor temperature is above the
    freezing point (0°C, 32°F). Switch on the
    A/C system when the car stands in a warm
    place.

    Headlight aiming
    WARNING
    Before checking/adjusting the headlight
    aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
    danger of fingers and hands being injured
    by moving parts.
    The radiator fan can start up even when
    the engine is switched off.
    The vehicle is equipped with vertical and
    horizontal aim indicators. The aim has been
    preset at the factory and should normally not
    need further adjustments. This is true even
    though your vertical and horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the "0" (zero)
    marks on their scales.
    If your headlight is damaged in a crash, the
    headlight aim may be affected. If you believe
    your headlights need to be re-aimed, we
    recommend that you take it to your Saab
    dealer for service. However, it is possible for
    you to re-aim your headlights as described
    in the following procedure.
    To check the aim, the vehicle should be
    properly prepared as follows:

    227

    • Place the vehicle on a level pad or surface
    • The vehicle should be unladen and fuel
    tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
    (75 kg) on the drivers seat
    • The vehicle should not have any snow, ice
    or mud attached to it
    • Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
    pressure
    • Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension



  • Page 228

    Car care

    NOTE
    To make sure that your headlights are
    aimed properly read all instructions
    before beginning. Failure to follow these
    instructions could cause damage to
    headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
    headlight.

    A

    B

    2

    1

    Vertical adjustment
    A Vertical aiming device
    B Vertical aim level

    IB1170

    Open the hood and locate the vertical aim
    level (B) that you can see through the top of
    the headlight lens.
    If you find that the headlight needs adjustment follow these steps:
    1 Locate the vertical aiming device (A)
    located behind and below the outer
    headlight assembly.
    2 Turn the vertical aiming screw with a
    0.24 in. (6 mm) Hexagonal Allen wrench
    until the bubble inside the level is centered between the two red lines (zero).
    3 Check the horizontal aim (1) and adjust
    as necessary. The horizontal aiming
    device (2) is located behind the inner
    headlight assembly. Turn the horizontal
    aiming knob until the zero (0) line on the
    knob aligns with the zero mark on the
    graduation scale.
    4 Recheck the vertical aim to make sure it
    is still correct after the horizontal aim
    adjustment. Readjust as necessary.

    IB1169

    228

    Horizontal adjustment
    1 Horizontal aim
    2 Horizontal aiming device



  • Page 229

    Maintenance and owner assistance

    229

    Maintenance and
    owner assistance

    IB1367

    Maintenance schedule.....
    Owner assistance ............
    Reporting Safety Defects
    (U.S.A.) ............................
    Reporting Safety Defects
    to the Canadian government ................................

    230
    231
    232

    232



  • Page 230

    230

    Maintenance and owner assistance

    Maintenance schedule
    The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
    service program to the purchaser/operator
    of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
    to ensure the proper emission control systems function, safety and reliability of the
    Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
    maintenance is recommended for specific
    components when the car is operated under
    certain severe conditions. Proper maintenance is always a good practice!
    Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
    trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
    They regularly receive up-to-date Saab service manuals and parts and technical service bulletins from Saab and are able,
    through their franchise agreement, to attend
    Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
    tools and technical assistance and purchase original equipment service and
    replacement parts.
    Today’s complex automobiles should only
    be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
    service professionals. A Saab dealer is your
    best choice.

    Service intervals

    Engine oil and filter changes

    The maintenance schedule is comprised of
    a Check -up 30 days after retail delivery, followed by services at every 10,000 miles
    (16,000 km) thereafter (10,000, 20,000,
    30,000 miles/16,000 32,000, 48,000 km
    etc.).

    Changing the engine oil and filter is required
    at every service point. Use only a Saab
    approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
    meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API
    service classifications stated in the “Technical data” section of this Owner’s Manual.
    The use of extra additives in the oil is not
    necessary and is not recommended, and
    may be harmful to turbochargers.
    More frequent oil changes are recommended if your vehicle is operated under
    any of the following conditions:

    NOTE
    The Check-up will be done by your Saab
    dealer at no charge and should be done
    as close as possible to the scheduled 30
    days.

    • Most trips are less than 5-10 miles (8-16
    km). This is particularly important when
    outside temperatures are below freezing.
    • Most trips include extensive idling (frequent stop-and-go traffic).
    • Most trips are through dusty areas (such
    as construction zones).
    • If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
    police, taxi or other commercial applications.
    If your driving habits match this description,
    have the engine oil and filter changed inbetween normal services at 5,000 mile
    (8,000 km) intervals. These conditions
    cause the engine oil to break down faster.
    The Warranties and Service Record Booklet has provisions to record extra oil
    changes.



  • Page 231

    Maintenance and owner assistance
    Service record retention

    Service costs

    Service instruction coupons and record
    stubs are provided in the Saab Warranties
    and Service Record Booklet which accompanies this Owner’s Manual. The coupons
    are arranged in the order that normal service should be performed. The edge of each
    coupon is shaded to correspond to the type
    of service point:

    Dealer pricing practices and labor for service work vary. Saab’s recommended service times for each service point do not
    include the labor required to replace wear
    items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
    tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
    repairs found to be necessary as a result of
    the inspections included in these times.
    Additional labor and parts will be charged
    for such work when necessary, except as
    covered under an applicable Saab warranty
    or any optional extended service contract.
    Transmission fluid changes or suspension
    alignment, when necessary, are also additional.
    Dealer charges for general shop material,
    regulated hazardous waste removal, recycling expenses or other operation costs may
    also be applied to service and repair
    invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
    location.

    • Striped - "Check-up".
    • Blue - Oil change/inspection service.
    • Black - Major service.
    Note that in Canada a combined service
    and warranty book is used, but not service
    coupons.
    When scheduled services are performed,
    your dealer will tear out the applicable
    coupon and use it to check off the operations performed and enter it into the service
    file at the dealership. The servicing dealer’s
    stamp, along with the date and mileage at
    which the service was done, should be
    entered on the corresponding stub which
    remains in your booklet. The booklet is your
    permanent record of the services performed. It also includes a log sheet for
    unscheduled repairs.
    It is advisable to retain receipts and, if possible, copies of shop work orders for all service and repair work, wherever performed.

    231

    Owner assistance
    Warranties and service problem
    assistance
    For complete information about all applicable warranties, including the New Car Warranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emission Warranty and Emission Perforation
    Warranty, consult the Warranties and Service Record Booklet which accompanies
    this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
    assistance information including Saab
    Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or
    misplaced, a new one may be ordered
    through a Saab dealer or by contacting
    Saab.
    In the U.S. there is a national Customer
    Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    The toll-free number to call from all 50 states
    is 1-800-955-9007.
    In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
    Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
    A list of authorized Saab sales and service
    dealers is available for those planning to
    travel in the United States and Canada.
    Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
    Customer Assistance Center in the country
    in which they are traveling.



  • Page 232

    232

    Maintenance and owner assistance

    Change of Address Notification
    (U.S. and Canada)
    Two change of address cards are provided
    at the end of the Warranties and Service
    Record Booklet. Knowing your current
    address allows Saab to contact you in the
    event of a recall or service campaign.
    Please help us keep our records up to date
    for your own peace of mind.

    Service information
    Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3
    and 9-5 car lines can be ordered through the
    dealer. These are comprehensive manuals
    on CD rom, geared to use by professional
    technicians.
    Consult your Saab dealer for prices for your
    model.

    Reporting Safety
    Defects (U.S.A.)
    If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
    which could cause a crash or could cause
    injury or death, you should immediately
    inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
    Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
    may open an investigation, and if it finds that
    a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
    it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
    However, NHTSA cannot become involved
    in individual problems between you, your
    dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
    Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-4249393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.
    area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
    of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.
    You can also obtain other information about
    motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

    Reporting Safety
    Defects to the Canadian
    government
    If you live in Canada, and believe that your
    vehicle has a safety defect, you should
    immediately notify Transport Canada, in
    addition to notifying General Motors of
    Canada Limited.
    You may write to Transport Canada at Box
    8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
    In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
    a situation like this, we certainly hope you
    will notify us. In Canada, please call our
    Saab Customer Assistance Centre at
    1-800-263- 1999.
    Or write:
    General Motors of Canada Limited
    Customer Assistance Centre,
    1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
    Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.



  • Page 233

    Technical data

    233

    IB993

    Technical data
    General dimensions.........
    Engine ...............................
    Engine oil..........................
    Fuel....................................
    Engine variants ................
    Electrical system..............
    Drive belts.........................
    Manual transmission .......
    Automatic transmission ..
    Suspension.......................
    Steering.............................
    Brake system....................
    Rims and tires ..................
    Plates and labels..............

    234
    237
    237
    239
    239
    240
    240
    240
    240
    241
    241
    241
    242
    243



  • Page 234

    Technical data

    General dimensions
    Overall length, with bumper(s):
    Coupé/5-door/Convertible____________
    Viggen __________________________
    Overall width, including door mirrors _____
    Maximum height ____________________
    Maximum height when the soft top is being
    operated (Convertible) ______________
    Wheelbase ________________________
    Track:
    front, Coupé/5-door/Convertible _______
    front, Viggen ______________________
    rear, Coupé/5-door/Convertible _______
    rear, Viggen ______________________
    Ground clearance at max. weight _______
    Number of occupants, incl. driver:
    Coupé and 5-door _________________
    Convertible _______________________
    Turning circle:
    measured at vehicle extremities _______
    curb to curb_______________________

    Gross vehicle
    weight (GVW)
    182.3" (4629 mm)
    182.7” (4639 mm)
    76.2" (1936 mm)
    56.2" (1428 mm)
    approx. 87"
    approx. 2200 mm
    102.6" (2605 mm)
    57.2" (1452 mm)
    57.7” (1466 mm)
    56.8" (1442 mm)
    57.3” (1456 mm)
    approx. 3.9"
    (100 mm)
    5
    4
    36.4 ft. (11.1 m)
    34.4 ft. (10.5 m)

    Maximum train
    weight
    (GVW + max.
    trailer weight)

    IB541

    234

    Maximum axle
    load, front
    Maximum axle
    load, rear
    Permissible load (in addition to the driver) = GVW minus curb weight.
    The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
    The precise curb weight of the vehicle (weight ready for driving + driver
    á 154 lbs. (70 kg) and load capacity are specified in the vehicle registration documents.

    Chassis number plate in engine bay
    Length of the trunk:
    rear seat raised, Coupé- and 5-door car
    37.0" (940 mm)
    rear seat lowered, Coupé- and 5-door car 67.2" (1705 mm)
    Volume of trunk according to SAE:
    with parcel shelf, Coupé- and 5-door car 15.9 cu.ft.
    (451 dm3)
    whole rear seat tipped forward,
    Coupé- and 5-door car _____________ 46.0 cu.ft.
    (1303 dm3)
    Convertible, soft top up _____________ 12.5 cu.ft.
    (354 dm3)
    Convertible, soft top down ___________ 10.1 cu.ft.
    (285 dm3)



  • Page 235

    Technical data
    Weight ready for driving (i.e. with full fuel
    tank, washer- fluid reservoir, standard
    tools and spare wheel)
    Coupé ___________________________ 2980-3170 lbs.
    (1350-1440 kg)
    Viggen, Coupé ____________________ 3130-3160 lbs.
    (1420-1435 kg)
    5-door ___________________________ 3020-3220 lbs.
    (1370-1460 kg)
    Viggen, 5-door ____________________ 3170-3210 lbs
    (1440-1455 kg)
    Convertible _______________________ 3110-3300 lbs.
    (1410-1495 kg)
    Viggen, Convertible ________________ 3250-3260 lbs.
    (1475-1480 kg)

    Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
    Coupé___________________________
    Viggen, Coupé ____________________
    5-door __________________________
    Viggen, 5-door ____________________
    Convertible ______________________
    Viggen, Convertible ________________
    Maximum axle load
    front ____________________________
    rear ____________________________
    Weight distribution:
    Curb weight, front/rear ______________
    GVW, front/rear ___________________

    235

    3930-4060 lbs.
    (1785-1840 kg)
    4060 lbs. (1840 kg)
    3980-4100 lbs.
    (1805-1860 kg)
    4100 lbs. (1860 kg)
    3940-4020 lbs.
    (1785-1825 kg)
    3990 lbs. (1810 kg)
    2300 lbs. (1045 kg)
    1930 lbs. (875 kg)
    approx. 62/38 %
    approx. 58/42%



  • Page 236

    236

    Technical data

    Maximum permitted load in trunk
    Coupé and 5-door at curb weight plus
    4 passengers at 155 lbs. (70 kg) ______ 130 lbs. (60 kg)
    For each passenger less in the rear seat the load may be
    increased by 100 lbs. (45 kg)
    Convertible at curb weight and
    3 passengers at 155 lbs. (70 kg) ______ 120 lbs. (55 kg)
    Coupé and 5-door at curb weight and
    rear seat right down ________________ 475 lbs. (215 kg)

    WARNING
    • The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
    Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
    fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
    these items.
    • When goods are being transported their security is important,
    especially if the car is being used with the rear seat down.
    Max. permitted roof load ____________

    220 lbs. (100 kg)

    Trailer weights:
    Trailer with brakes _________________
    Trailer without brakes _______________
    Recommended towbar-ball load ______

    Max. 3500 lbs.
    (1588 kg)
    Max. 1000 lbs.
    (450 kg)
    110-165 lbs.
    (50-75 kg)

    Maximum towing speed, trailer with
    brakes __________________________ 62 mph (100 km/h)
    The above max. weights and speed limit are those which Saab
    Automobile AB permits. Note that the national rules may set limits to permitted weights and speed; see also page 173.



  • Page 237

    Technical data
    Engine
    Type _____________________________ 4 cyl, 2 overhead
    camshafts,
    16 valves and 2 balancer shafts
    Cylinder bores ______________________ 3.54" (90 mm)
    Stroke:
    2.0 Turbo_________________________ 3.071" (78 mm)
    Viggen __________________________ 3.543” (90 mm)
    Swept volume:
    2.0 Turbo_________________________ 121 cu.in.
    (1,985 dm3)
    Viggen __________________________ 140 cu.in.
    (2.290 dm3)
    Idling speed _______________________ 900 rpm
    Antifreeze _________________________ Saab-approved
    antifreeze
    Coolant volume, cooling system ________ 8.7 qts. (8.5 l)

    237

    Engine oil
    Oil recommendation:
    We recommend the use of oils that are available from your
    Saab dealer, for regular oil changes. These oils fulfill the most
    stringent requirements set by API and ACEA classifications.
    Basic recommendations for Saab engines
    • SAE 5W-30 or 0W-30, 5W-40.
    The oil should be semi or fully synthetic and fulfill grade requirements for ACEA A3/B3, API SJ or higher. In addition to API
    and ACEA the ILSAC GF-3 specification is approved for use in
    applicable markets.
    Fully synthetic oils with viscosity’s 0W-40/50 of well known
    brands and fulfilling minimum ACEA A3/B3 are also recommended, especially for extreme driving conditions.



  • Page 238

    238

    Technical data

    Oil specification
    Oil for gasoline engines is classified by the API (American Petroleum Institute) and ACEA (European Automobile Manufacturers Associations) standards.
    API classifies engine oil into grade classes SH (since 1993) and
    SJ (since 1996). The SJ class fulfils more stringent requirements and has lower phosphorous level. A new grade API SL,
    introduced 2001, fulfils even higher requirements.
    These grade classes are most often combined with corresponding classes for diesel engines. The class designations for diesel
    engines begins with the letter "C" (Commercial). For example a
    grade combination suitable for both types of engine could be
    API SH/CD, SJ/CF or SL/CF.
    Under the ACEA nomenclature, oils are divided into Class A for
    gasoline engines and Class B for diesel engine passenger cars.
    There is a further class for heavy diesel engines. Each class is
    divided into grades: 1,2 and 3 where grades 2 and 3 normally
    encompass semi- and fully synthetic oils. The diesel class also
    has a fourth grade, B4, which encompasses tests and regulations aimed at improving the performance of direct injection
    diesel engines.
    In the same way as in the API system, gasoline and diesel
    engine specifications are combined for products that can be
    used in both types of engine. For example, a grade designation
    could be ACEA A2/B2 or ACEA A3/B3, B4.

    Viscosity:
    The viscosity of oil is classified according to the SAE standard.
    Nowadays, multigrade oils are always used in cars. The properties of these oils facilitate starting the car in cold weather but
    mean that the oil is also viscous enough to coat all moving parts
    under high pressures and with high outside air temperatures.
    Multigrade oils are graded with two viscosity’s, e.g. 5W-30,
    where 5W meets certain viscosity requirements at -4°F (-20°C),
    while 30 fulfils requirements at 212°F (100°C).
    Oil capacity inc. filter (on changing) _____

    4.0 l



  • Page 239

    Technical data
    Fuel
    Fuel-tank capacity __________________ 17 U.S. gal. (64 l)
    For optimum performance, we recommend
    the following:
    2.0 Turbo 185 bhp *) ________________ 90 AON, unleaded
    gasoline,
    minimum 87 AON
    2.0 Turbo 205 bhp and Viggen ________ 93 AON**),
    unleaded gasoline,
    minimum 87 AON
    *) Offered in Canada only
    **) If the car is filled with 90 AON gasoline
    and the outdoor temperature is above
    77-86°F (25-30°C), a slight decrease in
    engine performance may be noticeable.

    239

    Engine variants
    2.0 Turbo 185 hp, manual transmission *)
    Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________
    Max. torque (man.), EEC at 2100 rpm _
    Compression ratio _________________

    185 hp (136 kW)
    194.0 ft.lb (263 Nm)
    8.8:1

    2.0 Turbo 185 hp, automatic transmission
    Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________
    Max. torque EEC at 1900 rpm ________
    Compression ratio _________________

    185 hp (136 kW)
    184.4 ft.lb. (250 Nm)
    8.8:1

    2.0 Turbo 205 hp, manual transmission
    Rating, EEC, at 5500 rpm ___________
    Max. torque EEC at 2200 rpm ________
    Compression ratio _________________

    205 hp (151 kW)
    206.5 ft.lb (280 Nm)
    8.8:1

    2.0 Turbo 205 hp, automatic transmission
    Rating, EEC, at 5750 rpm ___________
    Max. torque EEC at 1900 rpm ________
    Compression ratio _________________

    205 hp (151 kW)
    184.4 ft.lb (250 Nm)
    8.8:1

    2.3 Turbo 230 hp, manual transmission
    Rating, EEC, at 5500 rpm ___________
    Max. torque EEC at 2500 rpm ________
    Compression ratio _________________

    230 hp (169 kW)
    258.1 ft.lb (350 Nm)
    9.3:1



  • Page 240

    240

    Technical data

    Electrical system

    Manual transmission

    Voltage ___________________________
    Battery capacity ____________________
    Starter motor ______________________
    Alternator rating ____________________
    Firing order ________________________
    Spark plugs:
    2.0 Turbo 185 bhp__________________
    2.0 Turbo 205 bhp__________________
    Viggen __________________________
    Electrode gap ______________________

    12 V
    60 Ah
    1.4 kW
    130 A/14 V
    1-3-4-2
    NGK PFR 6H-10
    NGK PFR 6H-10
    NGK PFR 6H-10
    0.95 mm
    (0.03740”)

    Drive belts
    Cars with A/C compressor ____________
    Cars without A/C compressor __________

    Outside length
    2345 mm
    1805 mm

    Type _____________________________ 5-speed, fully
    synchronized with
    final-drive gear and
    differential
    Oil type (for topping-up) ______________ Saab synthetic manual gearbox oil
    Oil capacity _______________________ 1.8 qts. (1.8 l)
    Speed (mph/km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear 26/42

    Automatic transmission
    Type _____________________________

    Gear selector positions ______________
    Oil quantity, total ___________________
    Oil volume (on changing) _____________
    Oil type ___________________________

    Clutch type ________________________

    IB929

    Speed (mph/km/h) at 1000 rpm in 4th gear

    Drive belt

    Electronically controlled 4-speed with
    torque converter
    and differential
    PRND321
    7.4 qts. (7.2 litres)
    3.4 qts. (3.25 litres)
    Texaco Texamatic
    Dextron III, mineral
    oil based
    Hydraulically-operated plate clutches,
    brake bands and
    one-way clutches
    25/40



  • Page 241

    Technical data
    Suspension
    Spring type, front and rear ____________
    Maximum deflection of springs:
    front, Coupé/5-door/Convertible _______
    front, Viggen ______________________
    rear, Coupé/5-door/Convertible _______
    rear, Viggen ______________________
    Dampers, front and rear ______________

    Brake system
    Coil springs
    6.4" (163 mm)
    6.5” (165 mm)
    8.3" (212 mm)
    7.9” (200 mm)
    Gas-filled telescopic shock
    absorbers

    Steering
    Steering __________________________

    Number of turns, lock to lock __________
    Oil type ___________________________

    241

    Power-assisted
    steering gear of
    rack-and-pinion
    type with telescopic, universal
    joint steering- column shaft
    3.0
    Power Steering
    Fluid CHF 11S

    Footbrake (ABS) ___________________

    Parking brake ______________________
    Brake fluid ________________________
    Disc diameter:
    front, Coupé/5-door/Convertible _______
    front, Viggen ______________________
    rear ____________________________
    Total friction area of brake pads:
    front, Coupé/5-door/Convertible _______
    front, Viggen ______________________
    rear ____________________________

    Hydraulic disc
    brakes with vacuum
    servo, diagonally
    split circuits
    Acts on rear wheels
    DOT 4
    Do not use DOT 5
    11.4" (288 mm)
    12.0” (306 mm)
    11.3" (286 mm)
    34.4 in² (224 cm²)
    35.9 in² (234 cm²)
    14.2 in² (92 cm²)



  • Page 242

    242

    Technical data

    Rims and tires
    Rim size:
    Coupé/5-door/Convertible____________
    Viggen __________________________
    Viggen must use 6.5 x 16 or 7 x 17
    Contact an authorized Saab dealer if you
    wish to fit other wheels than those fitted
    as standard.
    Tire sizes (summer tires):
    6.5 x 15 (not Viggen) _______________
    6.5 x 16__________________________
    7.5 x 17 Viggen only ________________
    Tire sizes (winter tires):
    6 x 15 (not Viggen) _________________
    6.5 x 16 _________________________
    Recommended rims for snow chains:
    Coupé/5-door/Convertible____________
    Viggen __________________________
    Spare wheel:
    Tire _____________________________
    Rim _____________________________
    Maximum life _____________________
    Maximum speed __________________

    NOTE
    6.5 x 15 or 6.5 x 16
    7.5 x 17

    Snow chains
    Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels and must be
    used on the following tire/wheel combinations:
    Wheel
    Tire
    6 x 15 _________185/65 R15 M+S (not Viggen),
    195/60 R15 (not Viggen) or
    195/60 R15 M+S (not Viggen)
    6.5 x 15________195/60 R15 (not Viggen)
    6.5 x 16________205/55 R16 or 205/55 R16 M+S

    195/60 R15
    205/55 R16
    215/45 R17

    Max. speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
    Consult your authorized Saab dealer of approved snow chains.

    185/65 R15 M+S
    195/60 R15 M+S
    205/55 R16 M+S

    NOTE

    6 x 15
    6.5 x 16
    T115/70 R16
    4.0 x 16
    2000 miles
    (3500 km)
    50 mph (80 km/h)

    Coupé/5-door/Convertible: Bigger rims than 17” must not be
    used. The offset of the rims must not exceed 49 mm.
    Viggen: Bigger rims than 17” must not be used.
    The offset of the rims must not exceed 42 mm.



  • Page 243

    Technical data

    243

    Plates and labels
    In contacts with your Saab dealer it may
    sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s
    chassis, engine and gearbox numbers.

    IB1933

    US

    CANADA

    1 Modification identity plate (in the spare
    wheel compartment).
    2 V.I.N. number inside windshield.
    3 Certification label.
    4 Gearbox number.
    5 Engine number.
    6 Label for tire pressures and color codes
    (trim and body).
    7 Chassis number.
    8 Chassis number (stamped on body).
    9 Vehicle Emission Control Information.



  • Page 244

    244

    Technical data
    position:

    IB541

    VIN:

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
    | | | | | | | | | | |
    |
    Y S 3 D F 5 8 K 7 2 2 005543

    | | | | | |
    1 2 3 4 5 6 = identification codes for certain chassis details

    1 - Region

    ____________

    Y = Northern Europe

    2 - Country _______

    S = Sweden

    3 - Manufacturer ___

    3 = Saab Automobile AB

    4 - Product line ____

    D = 9-3

    5 - Model series ___

    D = 9-3 with driver’s and
    passenger’s airbag
    F = 9-3 SE with driver’s and
    passenger’s airbag
    P = 9-3 Viggen with driver’s and
    passenger’s airbag

    6 - Body version ___

    3 = Coupé (3-door)
    5 = 5-door
    7 = Convertible

    7 - Gearbox _______

    5 = Manual 5-speed
    8 = Automatic 4-speed

    8 - Engine variant __

    G = 2.3 Turbo Viggen
    H = 2.0 Turbo (185 bhp)
    K = 2.0 Turbo (205 bhp)

    9 - Check digit ____

    0-9 or X

    10 - Model year _____

    2 = 2002

    11 - Factory ________

    2 = Trollhättan
    7 = Nystad

    12 - Serial number __

    000001-999999



  • Page 245

    Technical data
    Several of the systems in your Saab
    car may be adjusted to better fit your
    individual needs
    Some functions are governed by legal
    requirements and cannot therefore be
    reprogrammed.
    Consult an authorized Saab dealer for further information.
    Car alarm/central locking system:
    • The level of the siren when locking/
    unlocking, HIGH or LOW.
    • The number of blinks when locking/
    unlocking, 1 to 7.
    • Automatic locking of the trunk when the
    car is driven, 1 to 8 mph (2-14 km/h), YES
    or NO.
    • Preclude the unlocking of the trunk while
    the car is driven, YES or NO.
    • Automatic locking of the trunk after
    1 second-4 minutes if it has not been
    opened, YES or NO.
    • Automatic locking of the trunk when it is
    closed, YES or NO.
    • Automatic locking of all doors when the
    car is driven above 7.5 mph (12 km/h),
    YES or NO.

    Saab Information Display (SID):
    • Outdoor temperature display can be
    adjusted.
    Miscellaneous:
    • Select the on-time for heated rear seat.
    • Coolant temperature gauge adjustment
    can be increased/decreased.
    • Fuel level gauge adjustment can be
    increased/decreased.
    • Additional sweep of the wipers after windshield washer function (ON or OFF).
    • Courtesy Headlight Feature (follow-me
    home) on-time can vary from 20 to
    50 seconds.
    • Night panel illumination deactivation
    speed for the speedometer can be
    adjusted.

    245

    Following adjustments can be done
    by the driver:
    Automatic Climate Control (ACC):
    To alter the preprogrammed “AUTO“ start
    up mode with your own preferences you can
    manually select the desired settings for:
    • Temperature.
    • Fan speed.
    • Air distribution.
    See “Programming I” on page 90 and “Programming II” on page 91.



  • Page 246

    246

    Technical data

    Saab 9-3 Audio System:
    The following functions can be adjusted by
    the driver (see page 105):
    • Maximum starting volume (when the
    radio is switched on).
    • Telephone volume (if the car is equipped
    with a phone connected to the audio system).
    • Speed dependent volume (volume
    increases or decreases with vehicle
    speed).
    • Loudness.

    Alarm System:
    The glass breakage sensor can be temporarily disabled, see page 42.
    Daytime Running Lights:
    To disable, turn off the ignition and pull out
    fuse 15, see page 208.



  • Page 247

    Index

    Index
    A
    A/C system, fault diagnosis ________226
    A/C system, maintenance _________226
    ACC __________________________84
    ACC, useful tips _________________92
    Adjustment, steering wheel ________131
    Air conditioning (A/C), fault diagnosis
    and maintenance ______________226
    Airbag _________________________28
    Alarm __________________________41
    Alarm functions __________________44
    Alarm signals ___________________44
    Anti-corrosion treatment __________222
    Anti-theft system _________________41
    Ashtray _______________________135
    Audio System ___________________93
    Automatic climate control (ACC) _____84
    Automatic transmission ___________156

    B
    Battery ________________________195
    Boost starting from donor battery ___181
    Brake fluid, check _______________194
    Brake fluid, grade _______________241
    Brake pad wear indicators ___ 164, 194
    Brakes ________________________164

    Braking _______________________164
    Bulb table _____________________205

    C
    CD changer ____________________102
    CD player _____________________100
    CHECK messages _______________72
    CHECKING _____________________72
    Cabin lighting __________________133
    Calibration, ACC _________________90
    Car alarm ______________________41
    Care of safety belts ______________218
    Central locking __________________36
    Change of address notification _____232
    Changing a wheel _______________215
    Changing bulbs _________________200
    Changing the engine oil __________190
    Changing the key battery __________39
    Changing the wheels round _______212
    Changing wiper blades ___________198
    Chassis number ________________243
    Child car seats __________________19
    Child safety _____________________19
    Child safety locks, rear doors _______39
    Child seats _____________________19
    Cigar lighter ____________________135
    Cleaning the soft top, Convertible ____57
    Climate-control system, manual _____80
    Compact spare wheel ____________214
    Condensation water, A/C __________82

    247

    Condensation water, ACC _________ 85
    Convertible ____________________ 47
    Coolant ______________________ 192
    Courtesy Headlight Feature _______ 76
    Cruise Control _________________ 163
    Cup holder ____________________ 134

    D
    DICE/TWICE __________________ 207
    Date code, tires ________________ 214
    Dim low beam __________________ 75
    Dimmer _______________________ 78
    Direction indicators ______________ 76
    Direction-indicator stalk ___________ 76
    Dome lighting _________________ 133
    Door mirrors __________________ 137
    Drive belt _____________________ 197
    Driving in deep water ____________ 179
    Driving in hot weather ___________ 173
    Driving technique _______________ 170
    Driving with a compact spare wheel 184
    Driving with a load ______________ 178
    Driving with a roof load __________ 176
    Driving with the trunk lid open _____ 179

    E
    Economical motoring ____________ 170
    Electrical system, technical data ___ 240
    Electrical window _______________ 130



  • Page 248

    248

    Index

    Electrically adjustable seats _______127
    Electrically heated front seats ______129
    Electrically heated rear window _____83
    Electronic starting interlock _________37
    Emergency opening, fuel filler door _144
    Emergency operation of the soft top,
    Convertible ____________________52
    Emergency operation of the sunroof _132
    Emission control systems _________188
    Engine bay ____________________187
    Engine bay, cleaning _____________220
    Engine break-in period ______ 155, 170
    Engine number _________________243
    Engine oil, changing _____________190
    Engine oil, checking _____________190
    Engine oil, grade ________________237
    Engine oil, volume _______________238
    Engine variants _________________239
    Engine, description ______________188
    Engine, technical data ____________237

    F
    Fault codes, Audio System ________109
    Flat spot ______________________218
    Folding the soft top, Convertible _____49
    For long trips ___________________184
    Front fog lights __________________77
    Fuel filler door, emergency opening _144
    Fuel gauge _____________________68
    Fuel grade _____________________239

    Fueling _______________________151
    Fuel-tank capacity _______________239
    Fuse table _____________________208
    Fuses ________________________206

    G
    Gearbox number ________________243
    Gearbox oil, checking ____________191
    Gearbox oil, grade _______________240
    General particulars ______________234
    General safety instructions, Convertible 48
    Glove compartment ______________135

    Important considerations for driving 148
    Indicator lights __________________ 60
    Instrument lighting _______________ 78
    Integrated booster seat ___________ 26
    Interior equipment ______________ 123
    Interior lighting _________________ 133
    Interior lighting, Convertible ________ 58
    Interior rearview mirror __________ 137

    J
    Jack _________________________ 215
    Jump starting __________________ 181

    H

    K

    Handbrake _____________________168
    Hazard warning lights _____________76
    Head restraint ___________________18
    Headlight flasher _________________75
    Hood _________________________186
    Horn signal ____________________131

    Key __________________________ 36
    Key, removing _________________ 146

    I
    If the car does not start ___________147
    Ignition switch __________________146
    Immobilizer _____________________37
    Important considerations concerning
    cars with catalytic converters _____150

    L
    LATCH (child safety) _____________ 21
    Labels and plates ______________ 243
    Leather upholstery, care of _______ 219
    Load eyes ____________________ 142
    Locks _________________________ 36
    Lowering rear seat ______________ 138
    Luggage compartment __________ 138
    Luggage compartment, Convertible _ 56
    Luggage-compartment lighting ____ 142



  • Page 249

    Index

    M

    P

    Main beam _____________________75
    Main instrument panel _____________60
    Maintenance schedule ___________230
    Manual climate-control system ______80
    Manual raising of the soft top,
    Convertible ____________________52
    Manual transmission _____________155
    Manually opening the fuel filler door,
    Convertible ____________________58
    Manually opening the fuel filler door,
    Coupé and 5-door ______________144
    Maxi fuses _____________________207
    Memory, driver’s seat ____________128
    Motoring abroad ________________184

    Paint touch-up __________________221
    Parcel shelf ____________________141
    Park Brake Shift Lock ____________158
    Parking brake __________________168
    Parking lights ____________________75
    Plates and labels ________________243
    Power steering fluid, check ________195
    Power steering oil, grade _________241
    Pressure gauge __________________67
    Programmable driver’s seat _______128
    Programming, ACC _______________90

    N
    Night Panel _____________________73

    O
    ORVR ________________________189
    Odometer ______________________66
    Oil specification _________________237
    OnStar ________________________111
    Opening handle __________________36
    Owner assistance _______________231

    R
    Radio __________________________98
    Raising the soft top, Convertible _____51
    Rear fog light ____________________77
    Rear seat ______________________138
    Rear seat, tipping _______________138
    Rearview mirrors ________________137
    Rear-window wiper _______________79
    Recirculation ____________________82
    Recycling ______________________224
    Refuelling _____________________151
    Relay table ____________________209
    Release handle, hood ____________186
    Remote control __________________36
    Remote control battery, changing ____39
    Removing the key _______________146
    Reporting safety defects __________232

    249

    Rev counter ____________________ 66
    Reversing lights _________________ 77
    Roof rack _____________________ 176
    Rotating the tires _______________ 212
    Running-in ____________________ 155

    S
    SAHR, head restraint ____________ 18
    SID (Side Instrument Display) ______ 69
    SRS (airbag) ___________________ 28
    Saab Audio System ______________ 93
    Saab Trionic engine management
    system ______________________ 189
    Safety belts ____________________ 12
    Safety belts, care of _____________ 218
    Seat belts _____________________ 12
    Seat-belt pretensioners ___________ 13
    Seats ________________________ 124
    Service costs __________________ 231
    Service information _____________ 232
    Service intervals _______________ 230
    Service record retention _________ 231
    Side airbags ___________________ 30
    Ski hatch _____________________ 141
    Snow tires ____________________ 242
    Soft top storage, Convertible _______ 56
    Spare wheel __________________ 143
    Speedometer ___________________ 66
    Starting the engine _____________ 147
    Steering-wheel adjustment _______ 131



  • Page 250

    250

    Index

    Storage compartments ___________136
    Sunroof _______________________132
    Switches _______________________75

    T
    Tachometer _____________________66
    Technical data __________________233
    Telematics _____________________111
    Temperature gauge ______________67
    Textile carpeting, cleaning ________219
    Through-load hatch ______________141
    Tie-down eyes __________________142
    Tipping the rear seat _____________138
    Tire markings __________________212
    Tire pressure ___________________178
    Tire pressures __________________211
    Tires and wheels, sizes ___________242
    Tools _________________________143
    Top tether ______________________23
    Touching up paintwork ___________221
    Towing a caravan or trailer ________173
    Towing the car _________________179
    Traction Control System __________166
    Trailer hitch attachment __________173
    Trailer hitch load ________________176
    Transmission, automatic __________156
    Transmission, manual ____________155
    Transporting the car _____________179
    Traveling abroad ________________184
    Trip computer, SID _______________69

    Trip meter ______________________66
    Trunk _________________________138
    Trunk lid lock, Convertible __________56
    Trunk lighting ___________________133
    Trunk, Convertible ________________56
    Trunk, opening __________________40
    Turbo gauge ____________________67
    Turn signal _____________________76

    U
    Upholstery and trim ______________219
    Upholstery and trim, care of _______219
    Useful tips on starting ____________148
    Useful tips, ACC _________________92

    V
    Vanity mirror ___________________137

    W
    Warning and indicator lights ________60
    Warning labels ___________________7
    Warning light, AIR BAG (SRS) ______32
    Washer fluid ___________________199
    Washer jets ____________________199
    Washers _______________________78
    Washing ______________________220
    Waxing and polishing ____________221

    Wear indicators, brake pads ______ 194
    Wear indicators, tires ____________ 214
    Wheel, change ________________ 215
    Wheels ______________________ 211
    Wheels and tires, sizes __________ 242
    Window glass sensor, car alarm ____ 42
    Windshield washers _____________ 78
    Windshield wipers _______________ 78
    Winter driving _________________ 171
    Wiper blades __________________ 198
    Wipers ________________________ 78



  • Page 251

    Notes

    Notes

    251



  • Page 252

    252

    Notes



  • Page 253

    Notes

    253



  • Page 254

    254

    Notes



  • Page 255

    Notes

    255



  • Page 256

    256

    Notes






Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Saab 9-3 - 2002 wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Holen Sie sich Ihr Benutzerhandbuch per E-Mail

Geben Sie Ihre E-Mail-Adresse ein, um das Handbuch zu erhalten von Saab 9-3 - 2002 in der Sprache / Sprachen: Englisch als Anhang in Ihrer E-Mail.

Das Handbuch ist 11,93 mb groß.

 

Sie erhalten das Handbuch in Ihrer E-Mail innerhalb von Minuten. Wenn Sie keine E-Mail erhalten haben, haben Sie wahrscheinlich die falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben oder Ihre Mailbox ist zu voll. Darüber hinaus kann es sein, dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe für E-Mails empfangen kann.

Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info